Buffalo Engineering, P.C. Hope House October 10, 2017 ...savarinocompanies.com/content/documents/bids/Hope House Specs Div...Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 5. Proco Products, Inc

Buffalo Engineering, P.C.October 10, 2017

Hope House

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING 210517 – Page 1

SECTION 210517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General andSupplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to thisSection.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Sleeves.2. Sleeve-seal systems.3. Grout.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent toductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwiseindicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends andwelded steel collar; zinc coated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40,zinc coated, with plain ends.

D. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.


Hope House


2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.2. CALPICO, Inc.3. Metraflex Company (The).4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.5. Proco Products, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for fillingannular space between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel.3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure

plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS


1. Presealed Systems.

B. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made forimbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar withcenter opening to match piping OD.

2.4 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting,dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.


Hope House


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, andwalls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size largeenough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs andwalls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabsand walls are constructed.

1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP sleeves.

2. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipmentareas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

3. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.

D. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Complywith requirements for firestopping specified in Section 07 8413 "PenetrationFirestopping."

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade atservice piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and sizeand for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping inpenetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular spacebetween piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealingelements to expand and make a watertight seal.


Hope House


3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabsand walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

END OF SECTION 210517


Hope House

ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING 210518 - Page 1

SECTION 210518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrewfastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-platedfinish and spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and with concealedhinge and setscrew.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange.

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.


Hope House

ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING 210518 - Page 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping andwith OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type.f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type.h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with

polished, chrome-plated finish.i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with

polished, chrome-plated finish.k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping andwith OD that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.



Hope House

IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 210553 - Page 1

SECTION 210553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.2. Warning signs and labels.3. Pipe labels.4. Stencils.5. Valve tags.6. Warning tags.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for eachidentification material and device.

C. Equipment-Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled and theproposed content for each label.

D. Valve Schedules: Valve numbering scheme.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.


Hope House


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032 inch thick, with predrilled holes forattachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: Red.3. Background Color: White.4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not

less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than

24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionatelylarger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

6. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with

substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), andthe Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment-Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawingnumbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and theSpecification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipmentschedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,1/16 inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Red.

C. Background Color: White.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not lessthan 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately largerlettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.


Hope House


G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notificationinstructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, withlettering indicating service and showing flow direction.

B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesivebacking.

C. Pipe-Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designationsor abbreviations as used on Drawings; pipe size; and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering toaccommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicateflow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

D. Pipe-Label Colors:

1. Background Color: Red.2. Letter Color: White.

2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimumletter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similaroperational instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal.2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel black unless otherwise indicated.

Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1

unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping-system abbreviationand 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032 inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachmenthardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain.


Hope House


3. Valve-Tag Color: Red.4. Letter Color: White.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulatevalve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location ofvalve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), andvariations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar specialuses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.6 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, ofplasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or

"DO NOT OPERATE."4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond ofidentification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatibleprimers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and paintingof surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

D. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

E. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessibleceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such asshafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.


Hope House


2. Near each branch connection excluding short takeoffs. Where flow pattern is notobvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of

concealed piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run.7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced

labels.

3.3 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems. List tagged valves in avalve-tag schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and withcaptions similar to those indicated in "Valve-Tag Size and Shape" Subparagraphbelow:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: 1-1/2 inches square.

3.4 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other itemswhere required.



Hope House

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - Page 1

SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.2. Fire-department connections.3. Sprinklers.4. Alarm devices.5. Manual control stations.6. Pressure gages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed tooperate at working pressure of 250 psig maximum.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containingwater and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water dischargesimmediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heatmelts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections are included ifindicated.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 250-psig minimum workingpressure.

1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 20 percent, includinglosses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:

a. Building Service Areas: Ordinary hazard, Group 1.b. Office, hotel and public: Light Hazard.


Hope House


3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:

a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.

4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:

a. Office Spaces: 225 sq. ft.b. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft.c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.d. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise

indicated.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities,operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties andaccessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections,details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

D. Delegated Design: Provide approved Sprinkler Piping Drawing, including: Workingplans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authoritieshaving jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable. Calculations andshop drawings shall be prepared by a NICET Level III or higher technician under thedirection of a Registered Professional Engineer registered in New York State andshall be signed and sealed.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

G. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliancewith performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor'sMaterial and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals.


Hope House


1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinklersystems and providing professional engineering services needed to assumeengineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flowtest.

a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations,and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boilerand Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location andapplication.

D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation,and testing shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."2. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Shop/Coordination Drawings: Produced in electronic format (compatible withAutocad 2008) Detailed at ¼” =1’-0” scale, double lined. Drawings shall indicate pipelayout and elevation, and all equipment with manufacturers’ recommendedmaintenance access. The following items shall be shown and coordinated with eachother, using input from installers of the items and trades involved:

1. Duct and piping installation in all spaces, indicating coordination with generalconstruction, building components, and other building services. Indicateproposed changes to duct and piping layout.

2. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,components, and attachments to other work.

3. Fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignmentguides.

4. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.5. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.6. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, static-pressure class,

and service.7. Piping layout indicating sizes, configuration, and service.8. Elevation of top of ducts and pipes.9. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.10. Duct and pipe fittings.11. Reinforcement and spacing.


Hope House


12. Suspended ceiling components.13. Structural members to which duct and piping will be attached.14. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.15. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.16. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.b. Air outlets and inlets.c. Speakers.d. Sprinklers.e. Access panels.f. Ceiling details and perimeter moldings.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged withprotective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover,and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench.Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench.Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinklerused on Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube,and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations,and pipe sizes.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Standard Weight, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipeends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, Schedule 10in NPS 5 and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10,plain end.

C. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

D. Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 250, standard pattern.

E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.


Hope House


F. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 250.

G. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 250.

H. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.

I. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products byone of the following:

a. Anvil International, Inc.b. Shurjoint Piping Products.c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.d. Victaulic Company.

2. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.3. Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M,

malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensionsmatching steel pipe.

4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigidpattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferroushousing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick.1. Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges:

Ring-type gaskets.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwiseindicated.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys forgeneral-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materialsappropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES

A. General Requirements:

1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Piping: 250 psig.

B. Ball Valves:


Hope House



a. Anvil International, Inc.b. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc.3. Valves NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.4. Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile-iron

body with grooved ends.5. Valves NPS 3: Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.

C. Bronze Butterfly Valves:


a. Fivalco Inc.b. Global Safety Products, Inc.c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

2. Standard: UL 1091.3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig.4. Body Material: Bronze.5. End Connections: Threaded.

D. Check Valves:


2. Standard: UL 312.3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig.4. Type: Swing check.5. Body Material: Cast iron.6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

E. Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.c. Milwaukee Valve Company.d. NIBCO INC.e. United Brass Works, Inc.

2. Standard: UL 262.3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig.4. Body Material: Bronze.5. End Connections: Threaded.


Hope House


F. NRS Gate Valves:


a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary.b. American Valve, Inc.c. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.e. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.f. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.g. NIBCO INC.h. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

2. Standard: UL 262.3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.4. Body Material: Cast iron with indicator post flange.5. Stem: Nonrising.6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

2.5 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES


1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "ApprovalGuide," published by FM Global, listing.

2. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.

B. Angle Valves:


a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.b. United Brass Works, Inc.

C. Ball Valves:


a. Affiliated Distributors.b. Anvil International, Inc.c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.d. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.e. Fire Protection Products, Inc.f. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.g. Legend Valve.h. Milwaukee Valve Company.i. NIBCO INC.


Hope House


j. Potter Roemer.k. Red-White Valve Corporation.l. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.m. Victaulic Company.n. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

D. Globe Valves:


a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.b. United Brass Works, Inc.

2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES



2. Pressure Rating:

a. High-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 250 psig minimum.

3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.4. Size: Same as connected piping.5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

B. Alarm Valves:


a. AFAC Inc.b. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.c. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.e. Venus Fire Protection Ltd.f. Victaulic Company.g. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 193.3. Design: For horizontal or vertical installation.4. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure

gages, retarding chamber and fill-line attachment with strainer.5. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain

piping.6. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.


Hope House


C. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:


a. AFAC Inc.b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

2. Standard: UL 1726.3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.5. Size: NPS 3/4.6. End Connections: Threaded.

2.7 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Branch Outlet Fittings:


a. Anvil International, Inc.b. National Fittings, Inc.c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.d. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 213.3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.5. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch

outlets.7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as

required to match connected branch piping.8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.

B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:


a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.c. Victaulic Company.


3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.


Hope House


4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, andintegral test valve.

5. Size: Same as connected piping.6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

C. Branch Line Testers:


a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.b. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.c. Potter Roemer.

2. Standard: UL 199.3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig.4. Body Material: Brass.5. Size: Same as connected piping.6. Inlet: Threaded.7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.

D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:


a. AGF Manufacturing Inc.b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.c. Victaulic Company.d. Viking Corporation.


3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.5. Size: Same as connected piping.6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

2.8 SPRINKLERS


1. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.2. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.3. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.4. Victaulic Company.5. Viking Corporation.


Hope House


B. General Requirements:


2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 250 psig minimum.

C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:

1. Early-Suppression, Fast-Response Applications: UL 176.2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6,

and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicatedor required by application.

D. Sprinkler Finishes:

1. Refer to Sprinkler Schedule.

E. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinklermounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-typesprinklers are specified with sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat, plastic, white finish,one piece, flat.

2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, plastic, white finish, one piece, flat.

F. Sprinkler Guards:


a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.c. Victaulic Company.d. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 199.3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.9 PRESSURE GAGES


1. AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division.2. Ashcroft, Inc.3. Brecco Corporation.4. WIKA Instrument Corporation.

B. Standard: UL 393.


Hope House


C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter.

D. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig minimum.

E. Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" label on dial face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results forsystem design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING

A. Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping at service entrance to building.

B. Install backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated atconnection to water-service piping

C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to waterservice.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicategeneral location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far aspractical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approvalfrom authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect beforedeviating from approved working plans.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping inNFPA 13.

C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, andreductions in pipe sizes.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.


Hope House


F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete withshutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13.

G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

H. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent tostandpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.

I. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-departmentconnection, to drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve.Install drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside building.

J. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

K. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.

L. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main and at each sprinkler test connection.Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metalseated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Installgages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.

M. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.

N. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply withrequirements for escutcheons specified in Section 21 0518 "Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping."

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and specialfittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system'spressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, andfittings before assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thicknesssuitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according toASME B31.9.


Hope House


G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according toASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipeends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are

corroded or damaged.

H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualifiedprocesses and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use weldedjoints for galvanized-steel pipe.

I. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipeaccording to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, andbolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

J. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible withmaterials of both piping systems.

3.5 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim,controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sourcesof water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanentidentification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Install check valve Fire Department connection piping.

D. Specialty Valves:

1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, inmain supply to system.

2. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-lineconnection.

3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels.

B. Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not installpendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.


Hope House


3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirementsin NFPA 13.

B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply withrequirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification forElectrical Systems."

3.8 FIRE STOPPING INSTALLATION

A. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of all walls, partitions,ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire stopmaterials. Comply with requirements for fire stop materials and installations inDivision 07 Section "Penetration Fire stopping."


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaksand retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioningcontrols and equipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "SystemsAcceptance" Chapter.

4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.6. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department

equipment.

C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests andinspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.


Hope House


3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Piping between Fire-Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized,standard-weight steel pipe.

B. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be thefollowing:

1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-ironthreaded fittings; and threaded joints.

C. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one ofthe following:

1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-ironthreaded fittings; and threaded joints.

2. Schedule 10, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-endfittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; andgrooved joints.

3. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; andwelded joints.

D. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 5 and larger, shall be one of thefollowing:

1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; andwelded joints.

2. Schedule 10, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-endfittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; andgrooved joints.

3.12 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.

1. Concealed Sprinklers: Chrome plated, with factory-painted white cover plate.2. Upright Pendant and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated.

B. Spare Sprinklers

1. Provide a minimum of six (6) spare sprinklers for each type and temperaturerating of sprinkler that is used on this project.

2. Provide a spare sprinkler head box(s) and locate at a wall adjacent to thesystem riser.

3. Provide spare sprinklers in spare sprinkler cabinet labeled “spare sprinklers”.Mount on wall near sprinkler riser in accessible location.

4. Provide appropriate sprinkler wrench for each type of sprinkler used on theproject.



Hope House

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 – Page 1

SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.2. Sleeve-seal systems.3. Grout.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends andwelded steel collar; zinc coated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40,zinc coated, with plain ends.

D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closedwith welded longitudinal joint.



1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.2. CALPICO, Inc.3. Metraflex Company (The).4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.5. Proco Products, Inc.


Hope House


B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for fillingannular space between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel.3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure

plates to sealing elements.

2.3 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting,dry, hydraulic-cement grout.




PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, andwalls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size largeenough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs andwalls.


C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls areconstructed.


a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipmentareas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.



Hope House


D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint

sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply withrequirements for sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, andfloors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply withrequirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade atservice piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and sizeand for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping inpenetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular spacebetween piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealingelements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron or Galvanized-steel pipe wallsleeves.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron or Galvanized-steel pipe wall sleeves.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-sealsystem.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space betweenpiping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.



Hope House


3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron or Galvanized-steel pipe wallsleeves with sleeve-seal system.


b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron or Galvanized-steel pipe wall sleeveswith sleeve-seal system.


4. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.



Hope House

ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - Page 1

SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and rough-brass finish andsetscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-platedfinish and spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.


Hope House

ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - Page 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping andwith OD that completely covers opening.


a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-patterntype.

b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with

rough-brass finish.g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-

brass finish.


D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping andwith OD that completely covers opening.






Hope House

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - Page 1

SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.3. Thermowells.4. Dial-type pressure gages.5. Gage attachments.



1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product certificates.


A. Operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS


1. Ashcroft Inc.2. Ernst Flow Industries.3. Trerice, H. O. Co.4. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.5. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Standard: ASME B40.200.

C. Case: sealed type; stainless steel with 3-inch nominal diameter.

D. Dial: Non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales indeg F and deg C.


Hope House


E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle, with unified-inch screw threads.

F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel.

H. Window: Plain glass.

I. Ring: Stainless steel.

J. Element: Bimetal coil.

K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1.5 percent of scale range.

2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:


a. Trerice, H. O. Co.b. Weiss Instruments, Inc.c. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200.3. Case: Cast aluminum; 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.6. Tube Background: Non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings graduated in deg F and deg C.7. Window: Glass.8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a

maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range.

B. Plastic-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:


a. Ernst Flow Industries.b. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.c. Weiss Instruments, Inc.d. WIKA Instrument Corporation.


Hope House


2. Standard: ASME B40.200.3. Case: Plastic; 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings graduated in deg F and deg C.7. Window: Glass.8. Stem: Aluminum, brass, or stainless steel and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a

maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range.

2.3 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200.2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee

fitting.3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES.5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.4 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


a. Ametek U.S. Gauge.b. Ashcroft Inc.c. Ernst Flow Industries.d. Trerice, H. O. Co.e. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.f. Weiss Instruments, Inc.


Hope House


2. Standard: ASME B40.100.3. Case: Sealed nominal diameter.4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe

threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated

in psi.8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.9. Window: Glass.10. Ring: Metal, Brass, or Stainless steel.11. Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half of scale range.

B. Direct-Mounted, Plastic-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


a. Ametek U.S. Gauge.b. Ashcroft Inc.c. Trerice, H. O. Co.d. Weiss Instruments, Inc.e. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100.3. Case: Sealed type; plastic; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 ASME B1.20.1 pipe

threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated

in psi.8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.9. Window: Glass or plastic.10. AccuracyGrade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.5 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipethreads and piston porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension oruse on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipethreads.


Hope House


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position inpiping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Includebushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tiltedpositions.

F. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located onpipe at the most readable position.

G. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

H. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater.

I. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Building water service entrance into building.

J. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service andmaintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

K. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.2 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be one of thefollowing:

1. Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type.2. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.

B. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.3 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 20 to 240 deg F.


Hope House


3.4 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be[ one of] thefollowing:

1. Sealed, direct-mounted, plastic case.

3.5 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

B. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 160 psi.

C. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi.



Hope House

BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523.12 – Page 1

SECTION 220523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Brass ball valves.2. Bronze ball valves.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve.

1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from singlemanufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves.2. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design

criteria.3. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections.4. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-waterservice.

D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valvesmade with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required forsystem pressures and temperatures.

F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.


Hope House


G. Valves in Insulated Piping:

1. Include 2-inch stem extensions.2. Extended operating handles of nonthermal-conductive material and protective

sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals ordisturbing insulation.

3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Brass Ball Valves with Full Port and Brass Trim:


a. American Valve, Inc.b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.c. Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.d. DynaQuip Controls.e. Hammond Valve.f. Jomar Valve.g. KITZ Corporation.h. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.i. Marwin Valve; Richards Industries.j. Milwaukee Valve Company.k. NIBCO INC.l. Red-White Valve Corporation.m. Stockham; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.n. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.b. CWP Rating: 600 psig.c. Body Design: Two piece.d. Body Material: Forged brass.e. Ends: Threaded and soldered.f. Seats: PTFE.g. Stem: Brass.h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.i. Port: Full.


Hope House


2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves with Full Port, and Bronze or Brass Trim:


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.b. Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.c. Hammond Valve.d. Lance Valves.e. Milwaukee Valve Company.f. NIBCO INC.g. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.h. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.b. CWP Rating: 600 psig.c. Body Design: Two piece.d. Body Material: Bronze.e. Ends: Threaded and soldered.f. Seats: PTFE.g. Stem: Bronze or brass.h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.i. Port: Full.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allowservice, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.


Hope House


3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves withhigher CWP ratings may be substituted.

B. Select valves with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

3.3 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead ofthreaded ends.

2. Two-piece, brass ball valves with full port and brass trim.3. Two-piece, bronze ball valves with full port and bronze or brass trim.

END OF SECTION 220523.12


Hope House

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - Page 1

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.2. Trapeze pipe hangers.3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.4. Fastener systems.5. Pipe positioning systems.6. Equipment supports.


A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipmentshall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and underconditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight ofsupported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight ofsupported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment andobtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.




A. Welding certificates.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according toAWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASMEBoiler and Pressure Vessel Code.


Hope House


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion

to support bearing surface of piping.5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.

B. Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion

to support bearing surface of piping.3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assemblymade from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods,nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig] minimumcompressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig] or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig] minimumcompressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference ofpipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating belowambient air temperature.


Hope House


2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cementconcrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loadsand building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless-steel anchors, for use inhardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacitiesappropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.5 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps forpositioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.

2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structuralcarbon-steel shapes.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black andgalvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrinkand nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Installhangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support pipingfrom the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89.Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipesize or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified forindividual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loadsbeing supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.


Hope House


C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concreteslabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completelycured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer.Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operatingmanual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed andcompletely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's writteninstructions.

E. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply andwaste piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods,nuts, washers, and other accessories.

G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement ofpiping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitateaction of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Installadditional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete insertsbefore concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars throughopenings at top of inserts.

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads andstresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to notexceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

M. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may projectthrough insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hangershield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for buildingservices piping.


Hope House


2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrieris indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulationinserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as pipinginsulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or tosupport equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers andequipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections thatcannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arcwelding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting weldingwork; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength andcorrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.


Hope House


3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and

so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and toachieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areasimmediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shoppainting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and applygalvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systemsand equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are notspecified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipmentthat will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachmentsare in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers andattachments for general service applications.

F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel attachments for hostileenvironment applications.

G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copperpiping and tubing.

H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.


Hope House


J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except asspecified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulatedor insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F,pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspensionof pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches ofinsulation.

4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36,

with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steelplate.

7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36,with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steelplate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30,from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contractionmight occur.

9. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 iflongitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur butvertical adjustment is not necessary.

K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in pipingsystem Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risersNPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risersNPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in pipingsystem Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavyloads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in pipingsystem Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment tosuspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange ofbeams, channels, or angles.


Hope House


4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange ofbeams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams ifloads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from

above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is

required.

N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in pipingsystem Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids withinsulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing bymanufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that arenot specified in piping system Sections.

P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or instead of building attachments where required inconcrete construction.

Q. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to supportsupply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.



Hope House

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - Page 1

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.2. Warning signs and labels.3. Pipe labels.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:


a. Brady Corporation.b. Brimar Industries, Inc.c. Carlton Industries, LP.d. Champion America.e. Craftmark Pipe Markers.f. emedco.g. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.h. LEM Products Inc.i. Marking Services, Inc.j. Seton Identification Products.

2. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanicalengraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: Black.4. Background Color: White.5. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.6. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not

less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.


Hope House


7. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately largerlettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds tothree-quarters the size of principal lettering.

8. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.9. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with

substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), andthe Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawingnumbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and theSpecification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipmentschedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS


1. Brady Corporation.2. Brimar Industries, Inc.3. Carlton Industries, LP.4. Champion America.5. Craftmark Pipe Markers.6. emedco.7. LEM Products Inc.8. Marking Sevices Inc.9. National Marker Company.10. Seton Identification Products.11. Stranco, Inc.

B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

C. Letter Color: Black.

D. Background Color: White.

E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.


Hope House


G. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately largerlettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

I. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notificationinstructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS


1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc.2. Brady Corporation.3. Brimar Industries, Inc.4. Carlton Industries, LP.5. Champion America.6. Craftmark Pipe Markers.7. emedco.8. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.9. LEM Products Inc.10. Marking Sevices Inc.11. Seton Identification Products.

B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, withlettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semi-rigid plastic formed to cover fullcircumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesivebacking.

E. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations orabbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flowdirection.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering toaccommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicateflow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.


Hope House


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.2 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 09 9123 "InteriorPainting."

B. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessibleceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such asshafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal

units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and

inaccessible enclosures.4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of

concealed piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25

feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced

labels.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping

a. Background: Safety green.b. Letter Colors: White.

2. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Background Color: Safety black.b. Letter Color: White.

3. Natural Gas indoors and outdoors:

a. Background Color: yellow.b. Letter Color: Black.



Hope House

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - Page 1

SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic hot-water piping.2. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.3. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.




A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined bytesting identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials andadhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings ofapplicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

B. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified formiscellaneous components:

1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor PipingInsulation Schedule," articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloridecontent of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptableaccording to ASTM C 795.


Hope House


E. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.b. Knauf Insulation.c. Manson Insulation Inc.d. Owens Corning.

2. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosettingresin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL.Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"Article.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply withASTM C 449.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by thefollowing:

a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and forbonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries.c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or lesswhen calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the CaliforniaDepartment of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of VolatileOrganic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale EnvironmentalChambers."


Hope House


C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries.c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.



D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.


a. Dow Corning Corporation.b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.d. Speedline Corporation.



2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; complywith MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or lesswhen calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.


a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.b. Vimasco Corporation.


Hope House


2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mildry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.5. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambientservices.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries.c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.d. Knauf Insulation.e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.f. Vimasco Corporation.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry filmthickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.5. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries.c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.5. Color: White or gray.6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).7. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of VolatileOrganic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale EnvironmentalChambers."


Hope House


B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by thefollowing:

a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.5. Color: White.6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).7. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of VolatileOrganic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale EnvironmentalChambers."

2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesivecovered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwiseindicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting andforming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.


a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.c. Proto Corporation.d. Speedline Corporation.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.3. Color: White.


Hope House


4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, fieldfabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves,flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanicaljoints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

2.8 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylicadhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division.b. Compac Corporation.c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company.d. Knauf Insulation.e. Venture Tape.

2. Width: 3 inches.3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.5. Elongation: 2 percent.6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylicadhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division.b. Compac Corporation.c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company.d. Knauf Insulation.e. Venture Tape.

2. Width: 3 inches.3. Thickness: 6.5 mils.4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.5. Elongation: 2 percent.6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.


Hope House


C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylicadhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.


a. Compac Corporation.b. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company.c. Venture Tape.

2. Width: 2 inches.3. Thickness: 6 mils.4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.5. Elongation: 500 percent.6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

2.9 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:


a. Engineered Brass Company.b. Insul-Tect Products Co.c. McGuire Manufacturing.d. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.e. Truebro.f. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- andcold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans withDisabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:


a. Truebro.b. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot-and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADArequirements.


Hope House


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materialsthat will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be incontact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and evensurfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, andspecialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknessesrequired for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service.Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacketin either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, andspecialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and jointswith adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation athangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment tostructure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barriermastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Sealinsulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommendedby insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Installshields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger,support, and shield.


Hope House


K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rateand wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along bothedges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation withlongitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 incheso.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer'swritten instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams andjoints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of itsnominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations andcracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damagedareas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, andseal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.2. Testing agency labels and stamps.3. Nameplates and data plates.4. Cleanouts.

3.3 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roofpenetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof

surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoorinsulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoorinsulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches belowtop of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.


Hope House


B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulationflush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulationcontinuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall

surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoorinsulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoorinsulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashingat least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not FireRated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulationcontinuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" forfirestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except wheremore specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installationarticles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and otherspecialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwiseindicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings madefrom same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall bebutted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints,seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth,hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation ofsame material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipeinsulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tiewire. Bond pieces with adhesive.


Hope House


4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation ofsame material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlapadjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipeinsulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up toand including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints,seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation ofsame material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlapadjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipeinsulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, andirregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basketflange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging theinsulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipeinsulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times thethickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coatwith a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and abreather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexibleelastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers,valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVCcovers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union."Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressuretemperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitterson insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and aroundthe connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, andflashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform tothe following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation ofsame thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket asadjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extendinsulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thicknessover adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flangecover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band materialcompatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges,except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.


Hope House


4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consistingof mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with itsattached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inchesover adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange orunion cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assemblywith insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply andtrowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposedsurfaces with a metal jacket.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands andtighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, andprotrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, securelaps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do notstaple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive asrecommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barriermastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus

twice the thickness of pipe insulation.3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanketinsulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapseams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipeinsulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install miteredsections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation.Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipeinsulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipeinsulation to valve body.


Hope House


3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operationwithout disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.




1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, byremoving field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of theirinstallation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe,three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, twolocations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locationsof threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe servicedefined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspectionreveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.7 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses areidentified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listedfor a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on thefollowing:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.2. Underground piping.3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.8 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold, Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: Thickness as indicated onDrawings insulation thickness schedule.

B. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops forPlumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.



Hope House

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - Page 1

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes under-building-slab, aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, andfittings inside buildings.


A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Shop/Coordination Drawings: Produced in electronic format (compatible with Autocad2008) Detailed at ¼” =1’-0” scale, double lined. Drawings shall indicate pipe layout andelevation, and all equipment with manufacturers’ recommended maintenance access.The following items shall be shown and coordinated with each other, using input frominstallers of the items and trades involved:





and service.7. Piping layout indicating sizes, configuration, and service.8. Elevation of top of ducts and pipes.9. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.10. Duct and pipe fittings.11. Reinforcement and spacing.12. Suspended ceiling components.13. Structural members to which duct and piping will be attached.14. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.


Hope House


15. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.16. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube,fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipesizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61 Annex G.

C. Pex piping acceptable manufacturer: Uponor.

1. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123.2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.


Hope House


2.3 PEX PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PEX-a (Engle-Method Crosslinked Polyethylene) Piping: ASTM F 876/877 by Uponor

B. PEX-a Fittings: elbows, adapters, couplings, plugs, tees and multi-port tees (1/2 inchthrough 2 inch nominal pipe size): ASTM F1960 cold-expansion fitting manufacturedfrom the following material types:

1. UNS No. C69300 Lead-free (LF) Brass.2. 20% glass-filled polysulfone as specified in ASTM D 6394.3. Unreinforced polysulfone (group 01, class 1, grade 2) as specified in ASTM D

6394.4. Polyphenylsulfone (group 03, class 1, grade 2) as specified in ASTM D 6394.5. Blend of polyphenylsulfone (55-80%) and unreinforced polysulfone (rem.) as

specified in ASTM D 6394.6. Reinforcing cold-expansion rings shall be manufactured from the same source as

PEX-a piping manufacturer and marked "F1960".Pre-Sleeved Piping: PEX-a piping, with a high-density polyethylene (HDPE)corrugated sleeve.

C. Manifolds: Multiple-outlet assembly complying with ASTM F 877; with ASTM F 1960outlets.

1. Lead-free copper valved manifold.2. Lead-free copper branch manifold.

D. Refer to the New York State Holmes and Community Renewel (HCR) DesignHandbook section 4-04-13-A.

E. There shall be no connectors, unions, or splices, etc., located between the centralmanifold, or multiple line branch tee, and the termination stub-out at each fixture. Eachfixture stub-out shall be copper pipe secured to the building framing with compatible,heavy-duty, support plates that fastens the stub-outs securely in place.

F. Installations shall be pressure tested to 100 psi for a minimum of 4 hours.

G. The entire system shall carry a manufacturer’s 25 year warranty and be installed byplumbers trained in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements

H. The installing contractor shall provide an installation warranty of 2 years.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTING

A. PEX-to-Metal Transition Fittings:

1. Manufacturers: Provide fittings from the same manufacturer of the piping.2. Threaded Brass to PEX-a Transition: one-piece brass fitting with male or female

threaded adapter and ASTM F 1960 cold-expansion end, with PEX-a reinforcingcold-expansion ring.

3. Brass Sweat to PEX-a Transition: one-piece brass fitting with sweat adapter andASTM F 1960 cold-expansion end, with PEX-a reinforcing cold-expansion ring.


Hope House


B. PEX-to-Thermoplastic Transition Fittings: CPVC or PP-R to PEX-a Transition: one-piece thermoplastic fitting with male or female threaded adapter and ASTM F 1960cold-expansion end, with PEX-a reinforcing cold-expansion ring.

2.5 VALVES

A. PEX-to-PEX, Lead Free (LF) Brass Ball Valves (1/2 inch through 2 inch nominal pipesize)

1. Manufacturers: Provide ball valve(s) from the same manufacturer as the pipingsystem.

2. Full-port ball valve: two-piece, ASTM F1960 cold-expansion ends, with PEX-areinforcing cold-expansion ring.

3. LF brass valve with a positive stop shoulder manufactured from C69300 brass.4. In compliance with: 250 CWP, ANSI/NSF 359, ANSI/NSF 14/61, cNSF-us-pw_G

lead free 0.25% Lead max., ASTM F1960, ASTM F 877.

2.6 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21,nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwiseindicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys forgeneral-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching,and backfilling.


Hope House



A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement ofdomestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe andcalculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping asindicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according toAWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee withvalve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply withrequirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for PlumbingPiping" and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in Section 221119"Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

E. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

F. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utilitycompany's requirements.

G. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by buildingoccupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and serviceareas.

H. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areasat right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unlessspecifically indicated otherwise.

I. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panelremoval, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

J. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

K. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as orhigher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwiseindicated.

L. Install piping free of sags and bends.

M. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

N. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine,and specialty.

O. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump.Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gagesfor Plumbing Piping."


Hope House


P. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements forthermostats in Section 221123 "Domestic Water Pumps."

Q. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply withrequirements for thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for PlumbingPiping."

R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply withrequirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals forPlumbing Piping."

S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply withrequirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Sealsfor Plumbing Piping."

T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply withrequirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for PlumbingPiping."

U. Install PEX-a Pipe Support, expansion loops, arms and offsets in compliance withChapter 5 - "System Design and Layout" in the Uponor Plumbing Design AssistanceManual (PDAM).

V. PEX shall not be installed in areas within five feet of UV light.

W. Install piping in compliance with manufacturer's Plumbing Installation Guide.

X. Hangers and Supports:

1. Horizontal PEX-a Piping Hangers: Install CTS hangers suitable for PEX-a pipingin compliance with Chapter 6 - "Installation Methods" and local codes, with thefollowing maximum spacing:

a. 3 inch and below: Maximum span, 32 inches.b. 1-1/4 inch and above: Maximum span, 48 inches.

2. Vertical PEX-a Piping: Support PEX-a piping with minimum spacing of 5 feet.

3. Horizontal PEX-a Piping with PEX-a Pipe Channel: Install hangers for PEX-apiping with horizontal support channel in accordance with local jurisdiction andmanufacturer's recommendations, with the following maximum spacing:

a. 3/4 inch and below: Maximum span, 6 feet.b. 1 inch and above: Maximum span, 8 feet.

Y. Aboveground domestic water piping ( 3 inch and below) shall be the following: PEX-apiping, with engineered polymer (EP) or lead-free brass F1960 cold-expansion fittings,or lead-free brass compression fittings complying with ASTM F 877


Hope House



A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, andfittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrsand restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded

or damaged.

D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,""Brazed Joints" chapter.

E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end oftube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper TubeHandbook."

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size,type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket andbolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Pipe Joint Construction: PEX-a Connections: Install per manufacturer'srecommendations. Use manufacturer-recommended cold-expansion tool for ASTM F1960 connections.

H. Field Quality Control: Do not expose PEX piping to direct sunlight for more than 30days. If construction delays are encountered, provide cover to portions of pipingexposed to direct sunlight.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation inSection 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44,pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.


Hope House


B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8inch.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing andminimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.7. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.

E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

F. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing andminimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod.5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod.6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod.7. NPS 6: 12 feet with 3/4-inch rod.8. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 12 feet with 7/8-inch rod.

G. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

H. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 andmanufacturer's written instructions.

I. Hangers and Supports for Pex piping:

1. Horizontal PEX-a Piping Hangers: Install CTS hangers suitable for PEX-a pipingin compliance with Chapter 6 - "Installation Methods" and local codes, with thefollowing maximum spacing:

a. 3 inch and below: Maximum span, 32 inches.b. 1-1/4 inch and above: Maximum span, 48 inches.

2. Vertical PEX-a Piping: Support PEX-a piping with minimum spacing of 5 feet.3. Horizontal PEX-a Piping with PEX-a Pipe Channel: Install hangers for PEX-a

piping with horizontal support channel in accordance with local jurisdiction andmanufacturer's recommendations, with the following maximum spacing:

a. 3/4 inch and below: Maximum span, 6 feet.b. 1 inch and above: Maximum span, 8 feet.


Hope House


3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for serviceand maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting tojoin dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend andconnect to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, butnot smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but notsmaller than that required by plumbing code.

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller thanequipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection.Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials andinstallation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has beeninspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one daybefore inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presenceof authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping beforeconcealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observetests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensurecompliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not passtests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange forreinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authoritieshaving jurisdiction.


Hope House


2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they arenot air bound and that piping is full of water.

b.c. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that

have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed insegments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram ofportion of piping tested.

d. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water pipinguncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Exposework that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

e. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operatingpressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials.Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss intest pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

f. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portionthereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

g. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests andinspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate

flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation returnpiping to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of pipingduring installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified

for application where used and are clean and ready for use.8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and

operation.


Hope House


3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended,or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities havingjurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in eitherAWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does notappear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water comingfrom system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies ofwater-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as workprogresses.


A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating maybe used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwiseindicated.

C. Under-building-slab, combined domestic water, building-service, and fire-service-mainpiping, NPS 6 to NPS 12, shall be the following:

1. Plain-end, ductile-iron pipe; grooved-joint, ductile-iron-pipe appurtenances; andgrooved joints.

D. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast-or wrought-copper, lead-free solder-joint fittings; and lead-free brazed or soldered joints.


Hope House


E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper, lead-free solder-joint fittings; and brazed lead-free soldered joints.

F. Aboveground, combined domestic water-service and fire-service-main piping, NPS 6 toNPS 12, shall be the following:

1. Plain-end, ductile-iron pipe; grooved-joint, ductile-iron-pipe appurtenances; andgrooved joints.



Hope House

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 – Page 1

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Vacuum breakers.2. Backflow preventers.3. Balancing valves.4. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.5. Strainers.6. Hose bibbs.7. Wall hydrants.8. Drain valves.9. Water-hammer arresters.10. Trap-seal primer valves.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers,pressure gages, and flow meters in domestic water piping.

2. Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.




A. Field quality-control reports.




Hope House


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 14.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unlessotherwise indicated.

2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:

1. Standard: ASSE 1001.2. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.3. Body: Bronze.4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.5. Finish: Rough bronze or Chrome plated.

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:

1. Standard: ASSE 1011.2. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.3. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.4. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.

2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers RPZ-1, RPZ-2, RPZ-3:

1. Standard: ASSE 1013.2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.3. Pressure Loss: 13 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range.4. Size: (Two) 2-1/2 NPS.5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.6. End Connections: flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow.8. Accessories:

a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with

flanged ends on inlet and outlet.c. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.


Hope House


2.5 BALANCING VALVES

A. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.b. Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.c. Hammond Valve.d. Jenkins Valves; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.e. Milwaukee Valve Company.f. NIBCO INC.g. Red-White Valve Corporation.h. Stockham; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.

2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves.

3. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.4. Size: NPS 2 or smaller.5. Body: Copper alloy.6. Port: Standard or full port.7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.10. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.

2.6 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves TMV-1, TMV-2:


a. Armstrong International, Inc.b. Acornc. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.d. Leonard Valve Company.e. Powers.f. Symmons Industries, Inc.g. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1017.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.4. Type: Exposed-mounted, thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.7. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water

supplies, and adjustable, temperature-control handle.


Hope House


8. Tempered-Water Setting: 110 deg F.9. Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate: See Plans10. Pressure Drop at Design Flow Rate: See Plans.11. Valve Finish: Rough bronze.

2.7 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies

with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and for NPS 2-1/2 andlarger.

3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 andlarger.

4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.033 inch.b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.062 inch.

6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.8 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs HB-1:

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.2. Body Material: Bronze.3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet.5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum

breaker complying with ASSE 1011.8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze.10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.12. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle.13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.


Hope House


2.9 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Non-freeze Wall Hydrants WH-1:

1. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.3. Operation: Loose key.4. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include

wall clamp.5. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1.6. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread

complying with ASME B1.20.7.7. Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover.8. Box and Cover Finish: Satin nickel finish.9. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread

complying with ASME B1.20.7.10. Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant.

2.10 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.3. Size: NPS 3/4.4. Body: Copper alloy.5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

2.11 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water-Hammer Arresters:


a. AMTROL, Inc.b. Josam Company.c. MIFAB, Inc.d. Precision Plumbing Products.e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.g. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.h. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.i. Zurn Industries, LLC.


Hope House


2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.3. Type: Copper tube with piston.4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.12 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device TP:


a. MIFAB, Inc.b. Precision Plumbing Products.c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.e. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.f. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1018.3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.4. Body: Bronze.5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not

chrome finished.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systemsand to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination.Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with

air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of atleast two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gapdevice attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks areunacceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

B. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

C. Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves oninlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

D. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.


Hope House


E. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward draintrap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.Adjust valve for proper flow.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section 260526 "Grounding andBonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Section 260519 "Low-VoltageElectrical Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical connections.



1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer and double-check,detector-assembly backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdictionand the device's reference standard.

B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass testsand inspections.


3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixingvalves.



Hope House

DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 - Page 1

SECTION 221123 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.






A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location andapplication.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE, CLOSE-COUPLED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS CP-1, CP-2

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide productindicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.2. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Corporation. (Basis of Design)3. Grundfos Incorporated.4. Pentair Pump Group; Aurora Pump.5. TACO Incorporated.6. Wilo.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, single-stage, close-coupled,overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps designed for installation with pump and motorshaft mounted horizontal. NSF 61 annex G complaint.


Hope House


C. Pump Construction:

1. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft.2. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft with deflector, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.

Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.3. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic

seat, and rubber bellows and gasket.4. Bearings: Oil-lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type.5. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft

misalignment.

D. Motor: Three speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings; and resiliently or rigidlymounted to pump casing.

E. Capacities and Characteristics:

a. See Plans.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, andefficiency requirements for motors.

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so drivenload will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2.3 CONTROLS

A. Timers: Electric, for control of hot-water circulation pump.

1. Type: Programmable, seven-day clock with manual override on-off switch.2. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1, suitable for wall mounting.3. Operation of Pump: On or off.4. Transformer: Provide if required.5. Power Requirement: 24-V ac.6. Programmable Sequence of Operation: Up to two on-off cycles each day for

seven days.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Install horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps with shafthorizontal.

B. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers of size required to supportpump weight.

1. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 220529"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


Hope House


3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic WaterPiping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal toor greater than size of pump nozzles.

1. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check,shutoff, and throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves samesize as connected piping. Comply with requirements for valves specified inSection 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," and comply withrequirements for strainers specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water PipingSpecialties."

2. Install pressure gage and snubber at suction of each pump and pressuregage and snubber at discharge of each pump. Install at integral pressure-gagetappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction anddischarge piping around pumps. Comply with requirements for pressure gagesand snubbers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for PlumbingPiping."

D. Connect timers to pumps that they control.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended bymanufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.


Buffalo Engineering, P.C. October 10, 2017

Hope House

DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS 221123.13 - Page 1

SECTION 221123.13 - DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Duplex, variable-speed booster pumps.



B. Shop Drawings: For booster pumps. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.




A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for piping.

C. UL Compliance for Packaged Pumping Systems:

1. UL 508, "Industrial Control Equipment." 2. UL 508A, "Industrial Control Panels." 3. UL 778, "Motor-Operated Water Pumps." 4. UL 1995, "Heating and Cooling Equipment."

D. Booster pumps shall be listed and labeled as packaged pumping systems by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


Hope House


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SIMPLEX, VARIABLE-SPEED BOOSTER PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, fluid-handling system for domestic water, with pump, piping, valves, specialties, and controls, and mounted on base.

B. Pump:

1. Type: End suction as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 for end-suction, close-coupled, single-stage, overhung-impeller, centrifugal pump.

2. Casing: Radially split; cast iron. 3. Impeller: Closed, 304 stainless steel; statically and dynamically balanced and

keyed to shaft. 4. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: 316 Stainless steel shaft, Silicon Carbide Shaft journals

and chamber bearings, and EPDM O-rings. 5. Orientation: Mounted vertically.

C. Motor: Variable speed, with integral variable speed drive with built in pump controller. Pump, VFD, and controller shall be factory assembled by one manufacturer. Motor shall include Class F insulation with a Class B temperature rise. The VFD shall include pulse width modulation, include radio frequency interference filter, integral solid state overload protection.

D. Dielectric Fittings: With insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals.

E. Hydropneumatic Tank: Precharged diaphragm or bladder tank made of materials complying with NSF 61 Annex G.

F. Control Panel: Factory installed and connected as an integral part of booster pump; automatic for single-pump, constant-speed operation, with load control and protection functions.

1. Control Logic: Solid-state system with transducers, programmable microprocessor, and other devices in the controller.

2. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, general-purpose, Class A, full-voltage, combination-magnetic type with undervoltage release feature, motor-circuit-protector-type disconnect, and short-circuit protective device.

a. Control Voltage: 0-10-VDC, with integral control-power transformer.

3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1. 4. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase. 5. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch in cover of control panel,

plus pilot device for automatic control. 6. The pump system controller (Proportional-Integral) shall be a standard

component of the integrated variable frequency drive motor developed and supported by the pump manufacturer


Hope House


7. The pump system controller shall have an easy to use interface mounted on the VFD/motor enclosure. Pump system start/stop and set-point adjustment shall be possible through the use of two push buttons located on the drive enclosure.

8. The VFD/motor shall be capable of receiving a remote analog set-point (4-20mA or 0-10 VDC) as well as a remote on/off (digital) signal.

9. Pump status and alarm state shall be indicated via two LED lights located on the VFD/motor enclosure.

10. Advanced programming and troubleshooting shall be possible via an infra-red hand held programmer or a field connected personal computer. Pump system programming (field adjustable) shall include as a minimum the following:

a. System Pressure set-point, psig System start pressure, psig b. System Stop pressure, psig Minimum Pump Speed, % c. Pressure Transducer supply/range Maximum Pump Speed, % d. System Time (Proportional Gain) Integral Action Time

11. The infra-red programmer shall be capable of displaying the following status readings:

a. Pump Status (on, off, min., max.) System Set-point, psig b. Actual system pressure, psig Remote set-point, % c. Pump speed, rpm VFD/Motor input power, kW d. VFD/Motor total cumulative kWh VFD/Motor total operating hours

12. The infra-red programmer shall also be capable of displaying the following alarms, with the last five alarms stored in memory:

a. Loss of sensor signal Loss of external set-point signal b. Under-voltage & Over-voltage Motor overload (blocked pump) c. Motor over-temperature Drive over-temperature d. Drive Over-current

G. Sequence of operation:

1. The system controller shall receive an analog signal [4-20mA] from the factory installed pressure transducer on the discharge manifold, indicating the actual system pressure. When a flow demand is detected (system pressure drops below the start pressure) the VFD/motor shall start and increase speed until the actual system pressure matches the system set-point. As flow demand changes (increases or decreases), the speed of the pump shall be adjusted to maintain the system set-point pressure.

2. If a no flow shut-down is required (periods of zero demand) a bladder type diaphragm tank shall be installed. The tank shall be piped to the discharge manifold or system piping downstream of the pump. When zero flow is detected by the system controller, the pump shall be switched off. When the system pressure drops to the start pressure, (flow begins after shut-down), the pump shall be switched on, increasing speed to maintain the system set-point pressure. Zero flow conditions shall be detected by the system controller/factory installed pressure transmitter without the use of additional flow switches or motor current sensing devices


Hope House


H. Base: Structural steel.

I. Capacities and Characteristics:

a. See Drawings.

2. Hydropneumatic Tank:

a. See Drawings.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors.

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install booster pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Support connected domestic-water piping so weight of piping is not supported by booster pumps.

C. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.


Hope House


B. Connect domestic-water piping to booster pumps. Install suction and discharge pipe equal to or greater than size of system suction and discharge piping.

1. Install shutoff valves on piping connections to booster-pump suction and discharge piping. Install ball, butterfly, or gate valves same size as suction and discharge piping. Comply with requirements for general-duty valves specified in Section 220523 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping.

2. Install union, flanged, or grooved-joint connections on suction and discharge piping at connection to domestic-water piping. Comply with requirements for unions and flanges specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

3. Install valved bypass, same size as and between piping, at connections to booster-pump suction and discharge piping. Comply with requirements for domestic-water piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

4. Install flexible connectors, same size as piping, on piping connections to booster-pump suction and discharge piping. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

5. Install piping adjacent to booster pumps to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.


1. Perform visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge booster pump and test for leaks. Repair

leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start booster

pumps to confirm proper motor rotation and booster-pump operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

C. Pumps and controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



Hope House


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust booster pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust pressure set points.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 24 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting booster pump to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain booster pumps.



Hope House

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 221133 – Page 1

SECTION 221133 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.2. Piping specialties.3. Piping and tubing joining materials.4. Valves.5. Pressure regulators.


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.2. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig.









A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according toAWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASMEBoiler and Pressure Vessel Code.


Hope House



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket

welding.3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground

joint, and threaded ends.4. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating

of epoxy, adhesive, and PE.

a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

B. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11.

1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt-fusion typewith dimensions matching PE pipe.

2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying withASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, blacksteel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

3. Anodeless Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.

a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet.b. Casing: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black

steel, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coatingcovering. Vent casing aboveground.

c. Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting.d. Outlet shall be threaded or suitable for welded connection.e. Tracer wire connection.f. Ultraviolet shield.g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.

4. Transition Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.

a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inletconnected to steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40,Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating for abovegroundoutlet.

b. Outlet shall be threaded or suitable for welded connection.c. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling.d. Factory-connected anode.e. Tracer wire connection.


Hope House


f. Ultraviolet shield.g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating.5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig.6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.8. Maximum Length: 72 inches

B. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drainconnection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller.3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket

with 50 percent free area.4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

C. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connectingpipe and threaded-end connection.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materialsappropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying withAWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus areprohibited.

2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valvetype is applied in various services.

B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.2. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.


Hope House


3. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.4. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.5. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.6. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"Articles.

7. CWP Rating: 600 psig.8. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.9. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

C. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.

1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.2. Plug: Bronze.3. Ends: Threaded, socket, as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.4. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.5. Pressure Class: 125 psig.6. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.7. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS


1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas.2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.3. Elevation compensator.4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller.

B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.

1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.2. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.3. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at

the valve port.5. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.7. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at

maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to theregulator.

8. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, andnot exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.

9. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.10. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if

not connected to vent piping.11. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.


Hope House


2.6 DIELECTRIC UNIONS

A. Dielectric Unions:

1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tapemanufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 incheswide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metalliccore encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metaldetector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Fuel Gas Code of New York State for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 18 inches below finished grade.Comply with requirements in Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching,and backfilling.

1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 18 inches below finished grade, install itin containment conduit.

C. Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D 2774.

D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective

coating manufacturer.3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

F. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each service regulator. Pressuregages are specified in Section 22 0519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."


Hope House


3.2 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Fuel Gas Code of New York State for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement ofpiping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe andcalculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping asindicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structureduring progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except inequipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areasat right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unlessspecifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panelremoval.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sedimenttraps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipmentfor roughing-in requirements.

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect,including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning andemptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged orcapped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom ofdrip to remove plug or cap.

N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressureprotection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, belowgrade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.


Hope House


P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with levelside down.

Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection toeach piece of equipment.

S. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

T. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electricallyoperated valve.

U. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressuregages are specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply withrequirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals forPlumbing Piping."

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply withrequirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Sealsfor Plumbing Piping."

X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply withrequirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for PlumbingPiping."

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing or copper connector.

B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access spaceadequate for servicing and testing.

3.4 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings beforeassembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of

pipe.


Hope House


4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unlessdryseal threading is specified.

5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corrodedor damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processesand welding operators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at

field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean clothor paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 220529"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing andminimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas applianceequipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according toNFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valvewithin 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union betweenvalve and appliances or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close aspractical to inlet of each appliance.


Hope House


3.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping andEquipment" for piping and valve identification.

B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finishedgrade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.


A. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to Fuel Gas Code of New York Stateand authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.9 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Underground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:

1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion; service-line risers with tracer wireterminated in an accessible location.

2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings withprotective coating for steel piping.

B. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

C. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coatpipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

3.10 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 2” and smaller shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

C. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coatpipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.


Hope House


D. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threadedor wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings withprotective coating for steel piping.

3.11 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following:

1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.2. Bronze plug valve.

B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of thefollowing:


C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:




Hope House

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - Page 1

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.2. Specialty pipe fittings.

B. Related Section:

1. Section 221313 "Facility Sanitary Sewers" for sanitary sewerage piping andstructures outside the building.




A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

1.4 COORDINATION






and service.7. Piping layout indicating sizes, configuration, and service.8. Elevation of top of ducts and pipes.9. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.10. Duct and pipe fittings.


Hope House


11. Reinforcement and spacing.12. Suspended ceiling components.13. Structural members to which duct and piping will be attached.14. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.15. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.16. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:


PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and fittings in this article are available in NPS 2 to NPS 15 (DN 50 to DN 375).

B. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.

C. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

2.3 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe in first paragraph below is available in NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 15 (DN 40 to DN 375).

B. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

C. Retain one or both paragraphs below. If retaining more than one, indicate location ofeach type on Drawings. Couplings in first paragraph below are economical and aremade in NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 15 (DN 40 to DN 375). They may not be suitable forinstallation in corrosive soil.

D. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


a. ANACO-Husky.b. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.


Hope House


c. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.d. Fernco Inc.e. Matco-Norca.f. MIFAB, Inc.g. Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries.h. NewAge Casting.i. Stant.j. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and

tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipestop.

E. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


a. ANACO-Husky.b. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.c. Clamp-All Corp.d. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.e. MIFAB, Inc.f. Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries.g. NewAge Casting.h. Stant.i. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540.

3. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tighteningdevices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.


A. Copper Type DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wroughtcopper, solder-joint fittings.

C. Copper Pressure Fittings:

1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.


Hope House


D. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end.

1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material isindicated.

2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.

2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials,"for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste,and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

B. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

C. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and ventpatterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

D. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

E. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

2.6 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differencesin OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as andcompatible with pipes to be joined

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specifiedpiping system fitting.

3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide productsby one of the following:

1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.2) Fernco Inc.3) Froet Industries LLC.4) Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries.5) Plastic Oddities.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1173.c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern.

Include shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band andtightening mechanism on each end.

d. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.


Hope House


e. Sleeve Materials:

1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926,

PVC.3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material

compatible with pipe materials being joined.

4. Shielded, Non-pressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide productsby one of the following:

1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.2) Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries

b. Standard: ASTM C 1460.c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-

resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band andtightening mechanism on each end.

d. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified inSection 312000 "Earth Moving."


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement ofpiping systems.

1. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculatefriction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.

2. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved oncoordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except inequipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areasat right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unlessspecifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panelremoval.


Hope House


E. Install piping at indicated slopes.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping usingappropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends.

1. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks ifchange in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical.

2. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installedback to back or side by side with common drain pipe.

a. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines.

3. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees.4. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes

are connected.

a. Reducing size of waste piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

I. Lay buried building waste piping beginning at low point of each system.

1. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert.Place hub ends of piping upstream.

2. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use oflubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

3. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

J. Install soil and waste and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwiseindicated:

1. Building Sanitary Waste: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for pipingNPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 andlarger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Waste Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

K. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and FittingsHandbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

L. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

M. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.

N. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect tobuilding sanitary sewers in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.


Hope House


a. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319"Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install drains in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.

a. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 221319 "SanitaryWaste Piping Specialties."

O. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved byauthorities having jurisdiction.

P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves andSleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleevesand Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518"Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "CastIron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron SoilPipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

C. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. UseASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.

D. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, andthickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on boltthreads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.

E. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces.Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, andsolvent cements.

2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 appendixes.


Hope House


3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION


1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs.2. In Waste Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installationspecified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping andEquipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosiveenvironments.

2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosiveenvironments.

3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.4. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.



B. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimumrods.

E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacingand minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod.5. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is

limited to 60 inches.

F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.


Hope House


G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing andminimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.4. NPS 3 and NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.5. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.6. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.

H. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

I. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing andminimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod.5. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod.

J. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.

K. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-58 andmanufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transitionfitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect waste and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect waste piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller thanrequired by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizesindicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect waste and vent piping in sizes indicated, but notsmaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts withcover flush with floor.

5. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Section 221319"Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

6. Equipment: Connect waste piping as indicated.

a. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection.b. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


Hope House


D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service andmaintenance of equipment.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at finalconnection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and atfinal connection to each piece of equipment.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping.

B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identificationfor Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours beforeinspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing orclosing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction toobserve tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test orinspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities havingjurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary waste and vent piping according to procedures of authorities havingjurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that havebeen altered, extended, or repaired.

a. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test,complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced wasteand vent piping until it has been tested and approved.

a. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.


Hope House


3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test waste and vent piping exceptoutside leaders on completion of roughing-in.

a. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, butnot less than 10-foot head of water.

b. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, waterlevel must not drop.

c. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set andtraps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight andwatertight.

a. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leavebuilding. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg.

b. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure thispressure.

c. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional airthroughout period of inspection.

d. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect sanitary waste and vent piping during remainder of construction period to avoidclogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats ofwater-based latex paint.

E. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by waste and vent piping installation.


A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwiseindicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty hubless-piping couplings; and

coupled joints.3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.


Hope House


C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following:


coupled joints.3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:


coupled joints.3. Copper Type DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.4. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

E. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of thefollowing:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty cast-iron hubless-piping

couplings; and coupled joints.

F. Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty cast-iron hubless-piping

couplings; coupled joints



Hope House

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - Page 1

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cleanouts.2. Floor drains.3. Roof flashing assemblies.4. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.5. Flashing materials.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operatingcharacteristics, and accessories.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specifiedtesting agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts:


a. Josam Company.b. MIFAB, Inc.c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.d. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.e. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.f. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping4. Body Material: As required to match connected piping.5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head plug.6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout

size.


Hope House


B. Cast-Iron Floor Cleanouts FCO:


a. Josam Company.b. Oatey.c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.e. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.f. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.g. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for threaded, adjustable housing cleanout.3. Size: Same as connected branch.4. Type: Threaded, adjustable housing.5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.6. Clamping Device: Required.7. Outlet Connection: Inside calk, Spigot or Threaded.8. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket or Brass plug with tapered

threads.9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.12. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.13. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to

cleanout.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts WCO:


a. Josam Company.b. MIFAB, Inc.c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.d. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.e. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.f. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.4. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe

test tee as required to match connected piping.5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head plug.6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout

size.7. Wall Access: Round, stainless-steel cover plate with screw.


Hope House


2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. General Service Cast-Iron Floor Drains FD-1:

1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provideproduct indicated on Drawings or comparable product:

a. Josam Company.b. MIFAB, Inc.c. Prier Products, Inc.d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.e. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.f. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.g. Zurn Industries, LLC. (Basis of Design)

B. Heavy Duty Cast-Iron Floor Drains FD-2:

1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provideproduct indicated on Drawings or comparable product:

a. Josam Company.b. MIFAB, Inc.c. Prier Products, Inc.d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.e. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.f. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.g. Zurn Industries, LLC. (Basis of Design)

2.3 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES

A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:


a. Acorn Engineering Company.b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thick,lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches from pipe, withgalvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.

a. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.


Hope House


2.4 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Open Drains:

1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section;and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

B. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.

2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimumweights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness.3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.

B. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

C. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similaraccessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material beinginstalled.

D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

E. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to thefollowing, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage pipingunless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet

for larger piping.4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.


Hope House


B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flushwith finished floor.

C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of typesindicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

D. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drainsflush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor

drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage arearadii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than1/4-inch total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater

than 1-inch total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drainand adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes wherepenetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unlessotherwise indicated.

E. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extendthrough roof.

F. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

G. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 3 inches above floor.

H. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

I. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-sealprimer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

J. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste pipingdischarge into sanitary drainage system.

K. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors withwaterproof membrane.

L. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unlesstrap is indicated.


Hope House


3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" forpiping installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainageshapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness orthicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness orthinner.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embeddedin floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inchesaround sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8inches around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secureflashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt ordebris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.



Hope House

FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - Page 1

SECTION 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.2. Specialty pipe fittings.




A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and RelatedMaterials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plasticdrain piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

1.4 COORDINATION






and service.7. Piping layout indicating sizes, configuration, and service.8. Elevation of top of ducts and pipes.9. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.


Hope House


10. Duct and pipe fittings.11. Reinforcement and spacing.12. Suspended ceiling components.13. Structural members to which duct and piping will be attached.14. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.15. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.16. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:


PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

2.3 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, availablemanufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:

a. ANACO-Husky.b. Fernco Inc.c. MIFAB, Inc.d. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.e. Tyler Pipe.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.


Hope House


3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands andtightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipestop.

C. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


a. ANACO-Husky.b. Clamp-All Corp.c. MIFAB, Inc.d. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.e. Tyler Pipe.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540.3. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening

devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

2.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and ventpatterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

2.5 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS


1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differencesin ODs or of different materials. Include end connections same size as andcompatible with pipes to be joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified-piping-system fitting.

3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, availablemanufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Workinclude, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Fernco Inc.2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.


Hope House


b. Standard: ASTM C 1173.c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern.

Include shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band andtightening mechanism on each end.

d. Sleeve Materials:

1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926,

PVC.3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material

compatible with pipe materials being joined.

4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, availablemanufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Workinclude, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1460.c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-

resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band andtightening mechanism on each end.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement ofpiping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe andcalculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Installpiping as indicated unless deviations from layout are approved on coordinationdrawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except inequipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areasat right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unlessspecifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panelremoval.

E. Install piping at indicated slopes.


Hope House


F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches,bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees.Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes areconnected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

I. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Installtrue to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hubends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's writteninstructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

J. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwiseindicated:

1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

K. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and FittingsHandbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 orAWWA C105.

L. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

M. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.

N. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect tobuilding storm sewers in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fittingwith closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main piping. Complywith requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221423 "Storm DrainagePiping Specialties."

2. Install drains in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements fordrains specified in Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."

O. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved byauthorities having jurisdiction.

P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply withrequirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals forPlumbing Piping."


Hope House


Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply withrequirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Sealsfor Plumbing Piping."

R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply withrequirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for PlumbingPiping."


A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasketed joints according to CISPI's"Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron SoilPipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

C. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, andthickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on boltthreads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.

D. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces.Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, andsolvent cements.

2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendices.

3.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION


1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installationspecified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping andEquipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosiveenvironments.

2. Install stainless-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosiveenvironments.

3. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosiveenvironments.

4. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosiveenvironments.


Hope House


5. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.6. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.c. Longer than 100 Feet if indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.



B. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimumrods.

E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacingand minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod.5. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod.6. Spacing for 10-foot pipe lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings

is limited to 60 inches.

F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

G. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing andminimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod.5. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod.

H. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.

I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 andmanufacturer's written instructions.


Hope House


3.5 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transitionfitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.

1. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor cleanouts withcover flush with floor.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service andmaintenance of equipment.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed storm drainage piping. Comply with requirements for identificationspecified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours beforeinspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing orclosing-in after roughing-in.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction toobserve tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test orinspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities havingjurisdiction.

D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or,in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that havebeen altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submitseparate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced stormdrainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that wascovered or concealed before it was tested.


Hope House


3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing-in. Closeopenings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not lessthan 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts untilcompletion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,until satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt anddebris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwiseindicated.

B. Aboveground storm drainage piping shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, heavy-duty, hubless-piping

couplings; and coupled joints.3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

C. Underground storm drainage piping shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, heavy-duty, hubless-piping

couplings; and coupled joints.



Hope House

STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 - Page 1

SECTION 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General andSupplementary General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, applyto this section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof drains.2. Cleanouts.3. Flashing materials.




A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specifiedtesting agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOF DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Roof Drains:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provideproducts by the following:

a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.b. Watts Drainage Products Inc.c. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Roof Drain Type (RD-1, RD-2): Combination roof drain/overflow. Epoxy coatedcast iron body with combination membrane flashing clamp/gravel guard, with:

a. Cast iron dome.b. Acceptable product: Shown on Plumbing Fixture Schedule.


Hope House


c. Combination Primary and Secondary Drain.d. Under deck clamp.e. Vandal proof dome.f. 4” high internal standpipe on secondary drain.g. No hub outlet.h. Sizes as noted on plans.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Wall Cleanouts:

1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cleanouts. Include wall access.2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.3. Body Material: As required to match connected piping.4. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head plug.5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout

size.6. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with

screw.

B. Floor Cleanouts:

1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cleanouts. Include wall access.2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.3. Body Material: As required to match connected piping.4. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout

size.6. Top-Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.

2.3 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, 12 oz./sq. ft..

B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and0.04-inch minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dipgalvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-milminimum thickness.

D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similaraccessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material beinginstalled.

F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.


Hope House


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membranemanufacturer's written installation instructions.

1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain andadjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

2. Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets.3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to thefollowing instructions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 forlarger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller

and 100 feet for larger piping.4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flushwith finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of typesindicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install horizontal backwater valves in floor with cover flush with floor.

F. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor.

G. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door in wall if indicated.

H. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drainsflush with finished surface unless otherwise indicated.

I. Install sleeve flashing device with each conductor passing through floors withwaterproof membrane.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221413 "Facility StormDrainage Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, andspecialties.


Hope House


3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or otherdrainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of 6.0-lb/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0938-inch thickness orthicker. Solder joints of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0625-inch thickness orthinner.

2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embeddedin floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching the pipe size, with a minimum length of 10inches and with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inchesaround sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least8 inches around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt ordebris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.



Hope House

SUMP PUMPS 221429 - Page 1

SECTION 221429 - SUMP PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Elevator sump pumps.



B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.





B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELEVATOR SUMP PUMPS (ESP-1).

A. Submersible, Fixed-Position, Single-Seal Sump Pumps:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provideproduct indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Zoeller Company.b. Goulds Pumps; ITT Corporation.c. Grundfos Pumps Corp.d. Liberty Pumps. (Basis of Design)e. Little Giant Pump Co.f. Stancor, Inc.g. Weil Pump Company, Inc.h. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Corporation


Hope House

SUMP PUMPS 221429 - Page 2

2. Controls:

a. Enclosure: NEMA 4X wall-mounted.b. Switch: UL 508 and 778Approved.

3. Control-Interface Features:

a. Remote Alarm Contacts: For remote alarm interface.b. Building Automation System Interface: Auxiliary contacts in pump controls

for interface to building automation system and capable of providing thefollowing:

1) On-off status of pump.2) Alarm status.

4. Sump Pump Capacities and Characteristics

a. See Plans.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, andefficiency requirements for motors.

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so drivenload will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

B. Motors for submersible pumps shall be hermetically sealed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Pump Installation Standard: Comply with HI 1.4 for installation of sump pumps.



Hope House

FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 – Page 1

SECTION 223400 - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Gas-fired, Storage Domestic-water Heaters.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include ratedcapacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnishedspecialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:



A. Product Certificates: For each type of gas-fired, domestic-water heater, frommanufacturer.

B. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptableto authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to include inemergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


Hope House




B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Fabricate and label fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters tocomply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

C. ASME Compliance:

1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial,domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and PressureVessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial,finned-tube, domestic-water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and PressureVessel Code: Section IV.

D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contactwith potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components -Health Effects."

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees torepair or replace components of fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters that fail in materialsor workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.b. Faulty operation of controls.c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Gas-Fired, Storage Domestic-Water Heaters:

1) Heat Exchanger: Five years.2) Controls and Other Components: Three years.


Hope House


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GAS-FIRED, STAINLESS STEEL, CONDENSING, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS(DWH-1).

A. Commercial, Gas-Fired, Storage Type, Direct-Vent, high-efficiency, condensing typeDomestic-Water Heaters:


a. Bradford White Corporation.b. Lochinvar Corporation.c. Rheem Manufacturing Company.d. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation.e. State Industries.

B. Standard: ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 for gas fired, instantaneous, domestic-waterheaters for indoor application.

C. Construction: Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61 Annex G barriermaterials for potable water, with storage capacity. Glass coated. Integral poweredanodes which automatically adjust to protect tank.

1. Tapping: ASME B1.20 pipe thread.2. Pressure Rating: 150 psig3. Heat Exchanger: Helical heat exchanger coil. Glass coated4. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.5. Burner: Modulating, pre-mixed powered burner. Down fired. Top mounted

burner. Natural gas fuel.6. Automatic Ignition: Manufacturer’s proprietary system for automatic, gas ignition.7. Control: Adjustable temperature between 90 and 180 degrees F, integral

controller, with built in diagnostics, run history, and compatible with remotemonitoring.

D. Support: Floor.

E. Capacity and Characteristics:

1. See Plans.

2.2 VENTING KITS

A. Kit: Complete system, ASTM A 959, UL Listed, Type AL 29-4C stainless steel, pipe,vent terminal, thimble, indoor plate, vent adapter, condensate trap and dilution tank,and sealant.

B. Combustion-Air Intake: Complete system, PVC pipe, vent terminal with screen, inletair coupling, and sealant.


Hope House


C. Provide condensate drainage as required per manufacturer’s recommendations.Extend drainage piping to nearest floor drain.

D. Follow guidelines specified in manufacturer’s venting guide.

2.3 ET-1 THERMAL EXPANSION TANKS

A. Furnish and install as shown on plans pre-charged steel thermal expansion tank with afixed butyl bladder. The tank shall have a top 1”NPT stainless steel system connectionand a charging valve connection (standard tire valve) to facilitate the on-site chargingof the tank to meet system requirements. The tank must be constructed in accordancewith Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. NSF 61 annex Gcomplaint.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install gas-fired heaters according to NFPA 54.

B. Assemble and install heater trim.

C. Install electrical devices furnished with heater but not specified to be factory mounted.

D. Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices.

E. Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full sizeof gas train connection. Provide a reducer if required. Gas piping is specified insection 221133 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping".

F. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.

G. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve andunion or flange at each connection.

H. Equipment Mounting: Install boilers on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s).Comply with requirements for equipment bases specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete”.

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipmentprovided.

2. Construct concrete bases 4 inches high and extend base not less than 6 inchesin all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of boiler unless otherwiseindicated or unless required for seismic anchor support.

3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 5000 psi at 28 days.4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise

indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter ofconcrete base.


Hope House


5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend throughconcrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

6. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

7. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supportedequipment.

I. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for ElectricalSystems."

J. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be atleast full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required.

3.2 CONNECTIONS


B. Where installing piping adjacent to fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, allow space forservice and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal ofdomestic-water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative toinspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections,and to assist in testing.

C. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retestuntil no leaks exist.

D. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirmproper operation.

E. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controlsand equipment.

F. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests andinspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.


Hope House


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gas-fired,domestic-water heaters.



Hope House

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - Page 1

SECTION 224000 – PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies plumbing fixtures and trim. The types of fixtures specified include thefollowing:

1. Lavatories.2. Sinks.3. Water Closets.4. Urinals.5. Showers.6. Electric Water Coolers7. Mop Service Basin

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for separate grab bars and toiletaccessories not an integral part of plumbing fixtures.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit Product Data and installation instructions for each fixture, faucet,specialties, accessories, and trim specified.

B. Maintenance Data: Include data in Maintenance Manual.

C. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Submit certification of compliance with specified ANSI, UL, and ASHRAE Standards.2. Submit certification of compliance with performance verification requirements

specified in this Section.


Hope House



A. Codes and Standards:

1. ANSI Standard A117.1: "Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities AccessibleTo and Usable By Physically Handicapped People."

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store fixtures where environmental conditions are uniformly maintained within themanufacturers recommend temperatures to prevent damage.

B. Store fixtures and trim in the manufacturer's original shipping containers. Do not stackcontainers or store in such a manner that may cause damage to the fixture on trim.

1.6 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING

A. Schedule rough-in installations with the installation of other building components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, provide plumbing fixtures of one of thefollowing:

1. Lavatories, Sinks, Water Closets, Urinals:

a. American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products.b. Crane Co.c. Kohler Co.d. Toto

2. Stainless Steel Sinks:

a. Elkay Mfg. Co.b. Just Mfg. Co.c. Moen; Div. of Stanadyne.

3. Bathtubs:

a. Kohlerb. Clarionc. Aquatic Bath


Hope House


4. Showers:

a. Clarionb. Bradleyc. Powersd. Symmons

5. Faucets:

a. Symmons.b. Sloan Valve Co.c. Chicago Faucet Cod. Elkaye. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.f. Zurn Industriesg. Delta Fauceth. Moen Commercial Products

6. Flush Valves:

a. Sloan Valve Co.b. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.c. Delany

7. Water Closet Seats:

a. Church Products.b. Bemis Mfg. Co.c. Beneke Corpd. Olsonite Corp.; Olsonite Seats.

8. Fixture Supports:

a. Josam Mfg. Co.b. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.c. Tyler Pipe.d. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.e. Wadef. Watts

9. Electric Water Coolers

a. Elkayb. Acornc. Oasis Internationald. Halsey Taylor

10. Mop Service Basin

a. E.L. Musteeb. Fiat


Hope House


2.2 FIXTURES

A. Refer to “Plumbing Fixture and Equipment Schedule” on Drawing No. P0-01, Drawingsfollow this Schedule. Specifications are for additional information only.

B. Fixtures and related fittings specified by reference to a specific manufacturer's modelnumber are indicated so as to establish the type and quality of products expected.Equivalent products by listed manufacturers must meet this quality level as determined bythe Architect and Owner. All similar items shall be by one manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all plumbing fixtures may beinstalled in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and thereferenced standards.

B. Examine rough-in for potable water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations ofpiping connections prior to installing fixtures.

C. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.

D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's writteninstructions, rough-in drawings, and pertinent codes and regulations, the original design,and the referenced standards.

B. Comply with the installation requirements of ANSI A117.1 and the Americans withDisabilities Act with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped.

C. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports or building structure. Secure supplies behindor within wall construction to provide rigid installation.

D. Install a stop valve in an accessible location in the water connection to each fixture.

E. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locationsand within cabinets and millwork.

F. All exposed pipe, fittings, screws, nuts, washers, wall plates, rim guards, etc., shall bechromium plated brass. Teflon tape to be used on all screwed joints for chromium platedpipe. All escutcheons to have set screws.


Hope House



A. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after unitsare water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning units, then retest.

B. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust water pressure at faucets, shower valves, and flush valves to provide proper flowand stream.

B. Replace washers of leaking or dripping faucets and stops.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, trim, and strainers using manufacturer's recommended cleaning methodsand materials.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures, and trim.

B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless expressly approved in writing bythe Owner.


Buffalo Engineering, P.C.

October 10, 2017

Hope House

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230010 - Page 1

SECTION 230010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. All electrical work provided by Division 23 shall comply with Division 26 specifications

and specific requirements listed therein.

1.2 RULES AND REGULATIONS

A. Work and materials shall conform to and be executed, inspected and tested in

accordance with the latest edition of applicable Federal, State and local codes and with

the other governing rules and regulations of Federal, State and local governmental

agencies.

B. Specific codes and standards which will apply to this installation are listed in applicable

specification sections.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and includes

requirements common to more than one section of Division 23. It expands and

supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 1.

1. Submittals.

2. Coordination drawings.

3. Record documents.

4. Maintenance Manuals.

5. Rough-ins.

6. Mechanical installations.

7. Cutting and patching.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:

1. Division 23 Section "Division of Work, Divisions 23/26”, for electrical work divided

between Division 23 and Division 26 responsibility.

2. Division 23 Section "Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment", for

factory-installed motors, controllers, accessories, and connections.

3. Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods", for materials and

methods common to the remainder of Division 23, plus general related

specifications including:


October 10, 2017

Hope House


1.4 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1 Section

"Contract Closeout". In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate the

following installed conditions:

1. Ductwork mains and branches, size, and location, for both exterior and interior;

locations of balancing, smoke, fire control dampers and other control devices;

filters, boxes, terminal units and air terminals requiring periodic maintenance or

repair.

2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located

and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance

located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.) Valve

location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Refer to Division 23 Section

"Mechanical Identification." Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of

underground piping.

3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent

building lines.

4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and

materials installed.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 Section "Contract

Closeout". In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following

information for equipment items:

1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,

performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature

and commercial numbers of replacement parts.

2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and

routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping,

shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating

instructions.

3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and

troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting

instructions.

4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.


A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types,

grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.

B. Handle equipment carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not

install damaged equipment or components; replace with new.

C. Store equipment in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water,

construction debris, and physical damage.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


D. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading of

equipment and moving of equipment to final location.

E. Any specific additional delivery, storage and handling requirements are listed in the

applicable specification sections.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Materials

1. Piping Materials

2. Valves

3. Meters and Gauges

4. Supports and Anchors

5. Mechanical Identification

6. Vibration and Seismic Control

7. Mechanical Insulation

8. Hot Water Boilers

9. Cooling Tower/Heat Exchangers

10. HVAC Instrumentation, Controls and Sequences

11. Hydronic Specialties

12. HVAC Pumps

13. Make-up Air Units

14. Hydronic Slab Heating System

15. Ductwork Accessories

16. Air Outlets and Inlets

17. Air Terminals

18. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

19. Terminal Units

20. Exhaust and Supply Fans

B. Submittals shall include the following:

1. Product Data: Submit product data, including rated capacities, weights

(shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties and accessories; and

installation and start-up instructions.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating

dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, methods of assembly of

components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power

supply wiring to units. Submit manufacturer's ladder type wiring diagrams for

control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-

installed and portions to be field installed.

4. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and operating data. Include this data in

maintenance manual in accordance with requirements of Division 01.

C. Any specific additional submittal requirements are listed in the applicable specification

sections.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT APPLICABLE

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of

the actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 26 for rough-in requirements.

3.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical

systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other

building components.

2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during

progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set

in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are

constructed.

5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and

equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large

equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

6. Coordinate connection of new mechanical systems with existing mechanical

systems, equipment removals and relocations with the Owner. Perform this work

at such times to ensure that periods of shut-down are acceptable to the Owner.

7. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems,

materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

8. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and

overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing

regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide

required connection for each service.

9. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal

data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to

arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of

the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination

requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the

Architect.

10. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and

perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed

exposed in finished spaces.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 01 Section

"CUTTING AND PATCHING". In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01,

the following requirements apply:

1. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect

adjacent installations.


Flynn Battaglia Architects, PC Hope House August 10, 2017

BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 230050 - Page 1

SECTION 230050 - BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Mechanical sleeve seals. 3. Sleeves. 4. Escutcheons. 5. Grout. 6. Mechanical demolition. 7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 8. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. All mechanical equipment.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 23 Piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.


A. Refer to individual Division 23 Piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.



F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.

G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

2.3 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

B. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

C. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.

D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.4 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

2.5 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.



2.6 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Pitch piping to high points for venting, low points for draining.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.



N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing

elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

P. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.

Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.


A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.



F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

E. All lubrication shall be performed per the manufacturers printed instructions prior to start-up.



3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. The mechanical contractor shall be responsible to furnish and install all miscellaneous steel (not shown on the structural drawings), and equipment for the support of equipment furnished under their contract. Mechanical contractor shall also furnish and install all lintels, roof and floor framing for openings required for piping and ductwork located in the existing Building. All welding shall be performed by certified welders.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.6 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.

3.7 FIRE-STOPPING

A. Contractor shall be responsible for fire-stopping of all openings around mechanical systems at fire and smoke rated wall and floor assemblies.

B. Provide materials and products listed by an approved independent testing laboratory for “Through-Penetration Fire-Stop Systems.” The system shall meet the requirements of “Fire Tests of Through-Penetrations Fire-Stops” designated ASTM E814.

C. Provide rated, fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires and ductwork pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction.



3.8 TRAINING

A. Prior to acceptance of all systems and equipment, the contractor, along with his subcontractors and vendors, shall instruct and train the owner’s representatives on the operation and maintenance of all aspects of the new systems. Owner shall be given ample time to schedule training dates and personnel. Training sessions shall be given at intervals of 4 hours long. Training literature for startup procedures and maintenance shall be included in the O&M Manuals.

3.9 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING AND TESTING

A. All building HVAC alterations and testing of HVAC systems shall occur while the building is not occupied, and only after notice to the Owners Representative is made at least 24 hours in advance.



Hope House

MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING COORDINATION 230056 - Page 1

SECTION 230056 - MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The Contractor shall be held to have all the Bidding Requirements; Summary of Work; all of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions and all Divisions of the Technical Specifications before submitting a bid proposal for the project, and in the execution of the work, they will be bound by all of the conditions and requirements therein.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Work included in this section: Materials, equipment, fabrication, installation, and tests in conformity with applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction for the following:

1. Motors. 2. Factory-wired equipment (FWE). 3. Factory-wired control panels (FWCP). 4. Motor controllers where provided as part of mechanical equipment. 5. Motor controllers where supplied under Division 23 – Mechanical Work. 6. Disconnects and safety switches for mechanical equipment. 7. Fuses for equipment provided, and starters and disconnect switches.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Published specification standards, tests, or recommended methods of trade, industry or governmental organization as apply to work in this section where cited below:

1. ANSI – American National Standards Institute. 2. NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association. 3. IEEE – Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.


A. All equipment and accessories to be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in its manufacture.

B. Supply all equipment and accessories new and free from defects.

C. Supply all equipment and accessories in compliance with the applicable standards listed in Article 1.3 of this Section and with all applicable National, State and local codes.

D. All items of a given type shall be the product of the same manufacturer.


Hope House


1.5 DIVISION OF WORK

A. This section delineates the work required to be performed by contractors under Divisions 22, 23 and 26.

1.6 WORK REQUIRED UNDER DIVISION 23

A. Furnish motors, manual and combination starters, contactors, disconnect switches, electric thermostats, low voltage transformers and other electrical devices required for equipment furnished under Division 23. All manual starters, combination starters, and disconnect switches shall be installed by the Contractor under Division 26.

B. Install all control items in piping and ductwork such as aquastats, ductstats, etc.

C. All control wiring of equipment, all temperature control wiring, external wiring of control circuits of magnetic starters, interlocking wiring and mounting of control devices, etc., shall be included and provided under Division 23. All control wiring shall be in conduit unless specifically shown to be provided by the Division 26 Contractor.

D. Wiring required under Division 23 shall comply with the specifications as described in Division 26.

E. Division 23 shall furnish and install disconnect switches or safety switches for mechanical equipment. Unless specifically shown to be furnished and installed by the Electrical Division, starters and disconnects shown on the electrical drawings shall be installed by the Electrical Division and shall be furnished by the Mechanical Division.

1.7 WORK REQUIRED UNDER DIVISION 26

A. The Electrical work, under Division 26, shall include all power wiring and conduit to junction box, to disconnect switch on unit, to motor starters and contractors, and between motor starters and contactors to motor or other load. Electrical Division shall be responsible for proper direction of rotation for all three-phase equipment. The Electrical Division shall mount all starters, disconnects.

B. The Electrical Division shall provide disconnect switches sized as required or thermal switches with pilot lights, on all mechanical equipment not furnished by Division 23 and as required by the National Electrical Code, when equipment is not supplied with same.

C. The Electrical Division shall provide single or three-phase AC power, as required, to all mechanical equipment furnished and installed by Division 23.

D. All control devices (thermostats, etc.) required for mechanical equipment operation shall be furnished, installed, and wired by the Mechanical Division.

E. The Electrical Division shall, when requested, disconnect all existing power connections to mechanical equipment prior to removal of equipment by others.

F. The Electrical Division shall not purchase materials or initiate roughing work of electrical connections to equipment provided by other Contractors until receipt of reviewed submittals and coordination is completed.


Hope House


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Motors:

1. Baldor 2. Siemens 3. General Electric 4. Reliance

B. Motor Controllers and Disconnects

1. Square D 2. Allen-Bradley 3. Westinghouse

2.2 MOTORS

A. General: Motors shall conform to NEMA, IEEE, ANSI C50, and AIEE Standards.

B. For motors less than ¾ HP, furnish squirrel cage induction motors, capacitor-start of split-phase design to operate on single phase, 60 hertz, 120-volt circuit (NEMA standard motor voltage 115V) with built-in overload protection.

C. For motors 3/4 HP and larger, furnish squirrel cage induction or wound rotor induction motors, designed to operate on single-phase, 60-HZ, 240 volt circuit, unless otherwise specified on drawings.

D. Each motor shall not be overloaded by the apparatus it operates under any condition of operation. Where a minimum horsepower capacity is listed, furnish a motor larger than the minimum, if required in any particular case. Pay any additional cost due to necessary increase in feeder sizes, circuit breaker sizes, etc., provide under the Electrical Division.

E. All 3-phase motors shall be built for continuous operation on voltage, plus or minus 10% volts.

F. Belt-connected motors. Foundation slide base and shaft as required for aligning pulleys.

G. Service Factor: The “Service Factor” is a multiplier, which applied to the normal horsepower ratings indicates a permissible loading within the accepted safe limits of temperature rise for the insulation. Service factor for each motor shall conform to NEMA standards. Service factor for drip-proof enclosures is 1.15.

H. Temperature and Insulation System Class: Conform to NEMA standards for Class B or better. Insulation system rated at 40°C maximum ambient temperature.

I. Bearings: Equip motors 1/2 HP and larger with ball or roller bearings with pressure grease lubrication.


Hope House


J. Speed: As required and approved to meet the requirements of the service for which they are intended.

K. Motor Housing: Conform to NEMA requirements for a drip-proof machine unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings.

L. NEMA KVA locked rotor CODE LETTER: “G” or better.

M. Efficiency:

1. Per IEE Standard 112, 1978 or latest edition, Test Method B. 2. Unless otherwise noted, all motors less than 1 HP shall be of standard efficiency. 3. All motors 1 HP and larger shall comply with the following “High Efficiency” motor

schedules as follows. Motors shall have guaranteed minimum efficiencies equivalent to or exceeding the following:

HP Min. Eff. (%) HP Min. Eff. (%)

1 85.0 30 93.0

1-1/2 85.0 40 93.6

2 85.0 50 94.0

3 88.0 60 94.5

5 88.5 75 95.0

7-1/2 90.0 100 95.0

10 90.0 125 95.0

15 92.0 150 95.4

20 92.4 200 95.4

25 93.0 250 95.8

2.3 SAFETY SWITCH

A. Square D Co. Heavy Duty Series: Westinghouse Electric Corp. H-600, with the following:

1. Fused or unfused as required. 2. Fused switches equipped with fuseholders to accept only the fuses specified in

Section 16181 (U.L. Class RK-1, RK-5, L). 3. NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise indicated on drawing or required. 3R for

devices installed outdoors. 4. Switch rated 240V for 120V, 208V, 340V circuits. 5. Solid neutral bus when neutral or grounding conductor is included with circuit. 6. Current rating and number of poles as indicated on drawings.

2.4 NAMEPLATES

A. Phenolic Type: Standard phenolic nameplates with 3/8” minimum size lettering engraved thereon.

B. Embossed Aluminum: Standard stamped or embossed aluminum tags: Tech. Products, Inc., Seton Name Plate Corp.


Hope House


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Equipment shall be connected in a neat and skillful manner. Equipment delivered with terminal boxes that are inadequate shall be re-equipped with new terminal boxes by the Mechanical Division furnishing the equipment. The new terminal boxes shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code.

B. In general, rigid conduit or tubing shall be used, but equipment that requires movement or that would transmit vibration to conduit shall be wired with flexible, liquid tight, steel conduit not over 18 inches long.

C. All equipment shall be grounded with a green covered ground wire run inside the conduit and connected to equipment frame on one end and to the grounding system on the other end. All electrical work required in the Mechanical Contract shall conform to the applicable requirements of Division 26 of these Specifications.

D. The Mechanical Contractors shall cooperate with the Contractor for Electrical Work in making all necessary tests and in receiving, storing, and setting all motor-driven equipment, electrical devices, and controls furnished and/or installed under these contracts.

E. Install heaters correlated with full load current of motors provided.

F. Set overload devices to suit motors provided.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Control Wiring:

1. Provide control wiring and connections. 2. Where control circuit interlocking is required between individually mounted motor

controllers, provide a single pole on-off switch in a threaded type box mounted adjacent to motor safety switches which are remote from the control transformer to enable the interlock circuit to be opened when the motor safety switch is opened.

B. Nameplates: Rivet or bolt the nameplate on the cover of NEMA 1 enclosures. Rivet or bolt and gasket the nameplates on cover of NEMA 3R or NEMA 12 enclosures. Provide phenolic or embossed aluminum nameplates as follows:

1. On each remote control station, indicating motor controlled. 2. On each interlock circuit switch, indicating purpose of switch.


Hope House


3.3 DISCONNECTS

A. Motor Controllers: Provide safety switch for all motor controllers. Provide combination type starter-disconnect unless otherwise noted on drawings.

B. Motors: Provide a disconnect switch for all motors. Provide a separate safety switch for motors which are not within sight of the starter.

C. Provide safety switches for all factory packaged equipment.

D. Provide NEMA 3R safety switch for all rooftop and outdoor equipment.

E. Provide unit mounted disconnect switches for all equipment such as unit heaters, fans, unit ventilators, incremental units, etc.



Hope House

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC SECTION 230500 - 1

SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Sleeves. 5. Escutcheons. 6. Grout. 7. HVAC demolition. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Painting and finishing. 10. Concrete bases. 11. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.


Hope House


F. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.


Hope House


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.


A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.


Hope House


C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. f. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.


Hope House


2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America.

2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure

plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.6 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.


Hope House


D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

2.7 ESCUTCHEONS



C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

E. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

F. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.8 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved.


Hope House


C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.


F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type. f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-

casting, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

withrough-brass finish. h. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. i. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-

plate type.

2. Existing Piping: Use the following:

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.

b. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.


Hope House


c. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.

d. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with rough-brass finish.

e. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type. f. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting,

floor-plate type.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.


a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-

board partitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane

waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

P. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing

elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.


Hope House


Q. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.


A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.


Hope House


H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections.

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.6 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.


Hope House


2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 4500-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as

specified in Division 03 Sections.

3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.9 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.


Hope House


G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.



October 10, 2017

Hope House

ROOF CURBS/ SUPPORTS 230509 - Page 1

SECTION 230509 - ROOF CURBS/SUPPORTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation of roof curbs as shown in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Typical detail and schedule for equipment. Details shall include cross-sectional view illustrating clearly the type of curb being submitted, i.e. double wall insulated, with or without cant.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOF CURBS

A. Double wall, 1-1/2 in. minimum thickness, with wood blocking, fully insulated in the interior cavity with rigid insulation. All fans to have 18" high curbs. Curb constructed of galvanized steel, 1-1/2" 3# density with continuous welded corner seams and painted at all welds. 20 gauge up to 36 in., 18 gauge 38 to 72 in., 16 gauge over 72 in. in any dimension. Provide curb with gasket on top to make airtight seal between curb and ventilator, fan, or air handling unit. Curb provided with raised cant, flanged or recessed. Curb flange shall suit roof construction and type of insulation being applied.

B. Design Equipment: RPS Model 2A.

C. Acceptable Make: Pate, Shipman & Son, RPS.

2.2 ROOF DUCT/PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Rooftop pipe support system assembly.

B. Framing shall be 1-5/8 in. or 1-7/8 in. struts, as required by loading. Roll-formed 3-sided tubular shape, perforated with 9/16 in. holes at 1-7/8 in. centers on three sides, 12 gauge thickness. Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A 123. Hot dip galvanized nuts and washers.

C. Base shall be injection molded high density/high impact polypropylene with UV-inhibitors and antioxidants, black, 55.8 lb/cu. ft. density.


October 10, 2017

Hope House

ROOF CURBS/ SUPPORTS 230509 - Page 2

D. Design Equipment: PHP Systems PP-10 piping/PHP systems PPH – enclosed ductwork

E. Acceptable Makes: Dura-Blok, Mifab, Miro Industries, PHP Systems. 2.3 PIPE CURB ASSEMBLY

A. 2 in. x 2 in. continuous cap blocking, fully insulated with rigid 1-1/2" 3# density insulation. Minimum 12 in. high. Constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel with welded at all contact points. Painted at all welds. Acrylic coated, ABS rib reinforced curb cover and integral counter flashing, size and number of pipe and conduit openings as required to suit job conditions. EPDM protective rubber pipe boots and stainless steel clamps secured around each pipe individually. Curb provided with raised cant, flanged or recessed. Curb flange shall suit roof construction and type of insulation being applied.

B. Design Equipment: RPS N Series with RC-2A curb system.

C. Provide molded “ABS” plastic curb cover(s) with “EPDM” rubber cap (s) and stainless steel clamps for multiple openings and piping

D. Acceptable Makes: Pate, Shipman & Son, RPS.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Height as recommended by equipment manufacturer, not less than described in Part 2.0. This Contractor shall be responsible for exact size, length, and location and shall set and secure each curb to roof. Shim and level curb as required. Provide curb and supports for all roof-mounted equipment. All roof penetrations shall be made through an appropriate curb. All roof-mounted equipment including fans, air handling units, etc., shall be set on an equipment support unless otherwise noted. Refer to Contract Drawings for details on plenums extending from curbs.

3.2 ROOF DUCTWORK/PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Supports shall be placed at a maximum distance of 8’-0” on center. Adhere neoprene pad to roof membrane. Adhere polypropylene base to neoprene pad. Set and secure struts to base level. Adjust elevation of piping such that the bottom of the hanger is at 18” above roof membrane.

END OF SECTION


Hope House

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - Page 1

SECTION 230513 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.


Hope House


C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.

2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.


Hope House


2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)



Hope House

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517 - Page 1

SECTION 230517 – SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves. 2. Stack-sleeve fittings. 3. Sleeve-seal systems. 4. Sleeve-seal fittings. 5. Grout.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

D. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

E. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

F. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

G. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.


Hope House


2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:

1. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 2. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

B. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.



1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. Metraflex Company (The). 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 5. Proco Products, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubberinterlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of

length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.



1. Presealed Systems.

B. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=3029&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456811679&mf=04&src=wd











Hope House


2.5 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.




PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.


C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.

1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP sleeves.


a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.


D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint

sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."


Hope House


3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level.

4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.

B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.



B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.




Hope House


3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

2. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.



Hope House

ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 230518 - Page 1

SECTION 230518 – ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.

2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS



C. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.


Hope House

ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 230518 - Page 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.



D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.


2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.





Hope House

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - Page 1

SECTION 230529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND QUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Pipe stands. 7. Equipment supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.


Hope House




B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Fiberglass strut systems. 4. Pipe stands. 5. Equipment supports.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.




A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. Manufacturers:

1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. 2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports. 3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 5. Empire Industries, Inc. 6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.


Hope House


7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 8. Grinnell Corp. 9. GS Metals Corp. 10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.

C. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion

to support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

D. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel .

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. Flex-Strut Inc. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

3. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

4. Standard: MFMA-4. 5. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with in-turned lips. 6. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into

channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 7. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=6193&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd









Hope House


2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS


1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. Clement Support Services. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 5. PHS Industries, Inc. 6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. 9. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc. d. MKT Fastening, LLC. e. Powers Fasteners.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

1. Manufacturers:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. Hilti, Inc.












Hope House


d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners.


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.


Hope House


D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

M. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.


Hope House


2. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

3. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

4. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.


Hope House


3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

B. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

C. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

D. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications.

E. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

F. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

G. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36,

with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 7. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30,

from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

8. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

H. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

I. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

1. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.


Hope House


J. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required

tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from

above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is

required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to

linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

K. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

L. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.


Hope House


2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches.

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze

member.

M. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

N. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

O. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.



Hope House

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 - Page 1

SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Division 04 Special Inspections.

C. Contract Closeout: Comply with Division 01.

D. Requirements of the following Division 23 Sections apply to this section:

1. “Basic HVAC Requirements.”

2. “Basic HVAC Materials and Methods”

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide complete vibration and seismic control systems as shown or specified and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Systems shall be complete with foundations, vibration isolation, and supports for rigidly supported equipment.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. Extent of vibration work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and/or specified in other Division 23 sections. Provide for site Class 1B. Types of vibration and seismic control products specified in this section include the following:

1. Fiberglass Pads and Shapes.

2. Neoprene Pads.

3. Neoprene Mountings - Code A.

4. Spring Isolators, Free-Standing - Code B.

5. Spring Isolators, Vertically-Restrained - Code C.

6. Spring Isolation Hangers - Code D.

7. Neoprene Isolation Hangers - Code D1.

8. Precompressed Spring Hangers - Code E.

9. Flexible Pipe Connectors - Code L.

10. Flexible Pipe Connectors - Code K.

11. Acoustical Pipe Seal - Code M.


Hope House


12. All-Directional Anchors - Code N.

13. Riser Isolators.

14. Thrust Restraints - Code R.

15. Spring Isolators, Earthquake-Restrained - Code W.

16. Seismic Snubbers - Code Z.

17. Housekeeping Pad Anchors.

B. Related Sections: Refer to other Division 23 Sections for requirements that relate to this Section such as the following:

1. Vibration control products furnished as integral part of factory-fabricated equipment assembly.

2. Equipment foundations, hangers, sealants, gaskets, and other work related to vibration control work.

3. Requirements of electrical connections to equipment isolated on vibration control products.

4. Requirements of duct connections to air handling equipment isolated on vibration control products.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 230010 "Basic Mechanical Requirements".

B. For seismic control submittals, provide all applicable engineering calculations, bearing the stamp and seal of a registered engineer in the state which the project is constructed as follows:

1. Provide shop drawings including fabrication details for equipment bases, suspension and support details from structure, hung equipment, acceptable methods of attachment of ductwork/piping from structure. Provide specific details of seismic restraints/anchors including their sizes, quantities and locations.

2. Design and calculations verifying that the seismic restraints for equipment, ductwork, piping, and their connections will resist the seismic lateral forces required by the referenced Building Code.

3. Verification and the seismic restraints for rigidly-supported ductwork and piping is in accordance with the most current edition of the SMACNA “Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems”, including addenda.

4. Design and calculations verifying that seismic snubbers will resist seismic lateral forces required by the Building Code without deformation.

5. Drawings showing locations of seismic restraints, base, and construction for each piece of equipment, ductwork, piping, and their respective connections. Include method of vertical restraint used with cable restraint of vibration isolated equipment, ductwork and piping.

6. Drawings showing bolt locations, diameter of inserts and maximum loading for seismically retrained equipment, ductwork and piping.


Hope House



A. Except as otherwise indicated, obtain vibration and seismic control products from a single manufacturer.

B. Provide services of factory authorized representative to inspect the installation of all vibration isolation and seismic restraint systems.

1. This inspection shall be coordinated with the Project Final Inspection. 2. Contractor shall provide 2 weeks written notice in advance of Inspection. 3. Provide letter certifying that installation complies with manufacturers’

requirements and governing codes. 4. This inspection is in addition to inspections required by Section 014000, Special

Inspections.

C. Manufacturers shall have no less than 5 years’ experience in the production of specified products.

D. Coordinate with Special Inspector as per Section 014000.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide vibration control products of one of the following:

1. Mason Industries, Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Co. 3. Vibron 4. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 5. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.

2.2 VIBRATION CONTROL MATERIALS AND SUPPORT UNITS

A. Fiberglass Pads and Shapes: Glass fiber of not more than 0.18 mil diameter, produced by multiple-flame attenuation process, molded with manufacturer's standard fillers and binders through 10 compression cycles at 3 times rated load bearing capacity, to achieve natural frequency of not more than 12 Hertz, in thicknesses and shapes required for use in vibration isolation units.

B. Neoprene Pads: Oil-resistant neoprene sheets, of manufacturer's standard hardness and cross-ribbed or waffled pattern.

C. Neoprene Mountings (Code A): Provide neoprene mountings consisting of neoprene element bonded between 2 steel plates that are neoprene-covered to prevent corrosion. Provide minimum rated deflection of 0.35 inch. Provide threaded hole in upper plate and 2 holes in base plate for securing to equipment and to substrate equal to Mason Industries, Type N or ND.


Hope House


D. Spring Isolators, Free-Standing (Code B): Except as otherwise indicated, provide vibration isolation spring between top and bottom loading plates, and with pad-type isolator bonded to bottom of bottom loading plate. Include studs or cups to ensure centering of spring on plates. Include leveling bolt with lock nuts and washers, centered in top plate, arranged for leveling and anchoring supported equipment as indicated equal to Mason Industries Type SLFH.

1. Include holes in bottom plate for bolting unit to substrate.

E. Spring Isolators, Vertically-Restrained (Code C): Provide spring isolators in housing that includes vertical limit stops. Design housing to act as blocking during erection, and with installed height and operating height being equal. Maintain 1/2 inch minimum clearance around restraining bolts, and between housing and springs. Design so limit stops are out of contact during normal operation equal to Mason Industries Type SLR.

1. Isolators exposed to weather shall be hot dipped galvanized.

F. Spring Isolation Hangers (Code D): Hanger units formed with brackets and including a steel spring and 0.3 inch deflection neoprene element in series. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection, equal to Mason Industries Type 30N.

G. Neoprene Isolation Hangers (Code D1): Hanger units formed with brackets and including manufacturer's standard compression rubber isolation. Design brackets for 3 times rated loading of units. Fabricate units to accept misalignment of 15 deg. off center in any direction before contacting hanger box, and for use with either rod or strap type members, and including acoustical washers to prevent metal-to-metal contacts equal to Mason Industries Type HD or WHD.

1. Provide neoprene element with deflection range of 0.2 to 0.5 inch, securely retained in hanger box and color coded for weight range.

H. Pre-compressed Spring Hangers (Code E): Vibration hangers shall be as described in Code D but they shall be pre-compressed to the rated deflection so as to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Hangers shall be type PC30N.

I. Flexible Pipe Connectors (Code L):

1. For non-ferrous piping, provide bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid with copper tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze-welded to hose.

2. For ferrous piping, provide stainless steel hose covered with stainless steel wire braid with NPT steel nipples or 150 psi ANSI flanges, welded to hose.


Hope House


J. Flexible Pipe Connectors (Code K): Provide neoprene or EDPM construction consisting of multiple plies of nylon tire cord fabric and elastomer molded and cured in hydraulic rubber presses. Provide straight or elbow connector as indicated, rated at 125 psi at 220 deg. F (104 deg. C).

K. Acoustical Pipe Seal (Code M) (Acoustical Floor, Ceiling and Wall Seals): Provide split seal consisting of two bolted pipe halves with 3/4 inch or thicker neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1 inch past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240 degrees F, 10 lb. density fiberglass may be used in lieu of the sponge, equal to Mason Industries Type SWS.

L. All-Directional Anchors (Code N): Provide all-directional acoustical pipe anchor consisting of telescopic arrangement of 2 sizes of steel tubing separated by minimum 1/2 inch thickness of heavy-duty neoprene and duck, or neoprene isolation material. Provide vertical restraints by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Design for maximum 500 psi load on isolation materials, and provide for equal resistance in any direction. Equip anchor with threaded hole on top and 2 holes in base plate for bolting down; or provide welding provisions top and bottom, if indicated, equal to Mason Industries Type ADA.

M. Riser Isolators: Suspend risers from, or support risers by, spring hangers or spring isolators. Wherever possible, anchor risers at central point with Code N resilient anchors. Provide hanger or mounting deflection of 0.75 inch except in those expansion locations where additional deflection is required to limit deflection or load changes to +\- 25 percent of initial deflection. Provide sliding guides held in position by resilient anchors, located between anchor points and end of piping, spaced as indicated.

N. Thrust Restraints (Code R): Provide horizontal thrust restraints consisting of spring elements in series with neoprene pad. Select spring deflection same as for equipment loading. Design so thrust restraints can be pre-set and adjusted in field. Attach horizontal restraints at centerline of thrust and symmetrically on either side of unit.

O. Spring Isolators, Earthquake-Restrained (Code W): Provide spring isolator assembly which will resist horizontal and vertical forces in accordance with applicable regional seismic codes.


Hope House


P. Seismic Snubbers (Code Z): Provide seismic snubbers, separate from spring isolators, for attachment to equipment base, designed to provide seismic restraint in all modes in accordance with applicable building code. Provide snubbers designed to have no contact during normal operation, and have minimum clearances of 1/4 inch in all directions. The snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by shock absorbent rubber materials compounded to bridge bearing specifications per ASTM D-676, ASTM D-412, ASTM D-573, ASTM D-1149 and ASTM D-395.

1. Elastomeric materials shall be replaceable and a minimum of 3/4" thick. Snubbers shall be manufactured with an air gap between hard and resilient material of not less than 1/8" nor more than 1/4". Snubbers shall be installed with factory set clearances.

2. The capacity of the seismic snubber at 3/8" deflection shall be 3 to 4 times the load assigned to the mount grouping in its immediate area. Submittals shall include load deflection curves up to 1/2" deflection in the x, y and z planes. Tests shall be conducted in an independent laboratory or under the signed supervision of an independent registered engineer. The snubber assemblies shall be bolted to the test machine as the snubber is normally installed. Test reports shall certify that neither the neoprene elements nor the snubber body sustained any obvious deformation after release of load. Snubbers shall be equal to series Z-1011 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. or approved equal.

Q. Housekeeping pad anchors: Shall consist of a ductile iron casting that is tapered and hexagonal, smaller at its base that at its top. The upper portion shall have holes for rebar to pass through. The anchor shall be continuously threaded from top to bottom for the attachment of soleplates. Housekeeping pad anchors shall be attached to the structural slab using a stud wedge anchor. Housekeeping pad anchors shall be type HPA and stud wedge anchor shall be type SAS both as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which vibration and seismic control units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS

A. General: Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by ASHRAE, for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated.

B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units.


Hope House


3.3 APPLICATIONS

A. General: Supply vibration isolation products as scheduled on drawings and installed in accordance with ASHRAE Handbook, 2003 HVAC Applications Volume, Chapter 46 "Sound and Vibration Control", and Chapter 53 “Seismic and Wind Restraint Design”.

B. Piping:

1. All chilled water, hot water, steam, refrigerant, domestic water, drain and engine exhaust piping that is connected to vibration-isolated equipment shall be isolated from the building structure within the following limits:

a. Within mechanical rooms and boiler rooms. b. Within 50' total pipe length of connected vibration-isolated equipment

(chillers, pumps, air handling units, pressure reducing stations, etc.).

2. Piping shall be isolated from the building structure by means of vibration isolation mounts, resilient pipe guides, and resilient penetration sleeve/seals.

3. Isolators for the first three support points adjacent to connected equipment shall achieve one half the specified static deflection of the isolators supporting the connected equipment. When the required static deflection of these isolators is greater than 1/2", Code B or Code E isolators shall be used. When the required static deflection is less than or equal to 1/2", Type Code A or Code D1 isolators shall be used. All other pipe support isolators within the specified limits shall be either Code A, D or D1 achieving 0.25" static deflection.

4. For piping connected to equipment hanging from structure under occupied spaces, the first three hangers shall have 0.75 inch deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 3 inches, 1.5 inch deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 6 inches and 2.5 inch deflection thereafter. All other hangers and mounts shall have a minimum steel spring deflection of 0.75 inches. Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead supports as practical.

5. Where lateral support of pipe risers is required within the specified limits, this shall be accomplished by use of resilient lateral supports.

6. Pipes within the specified limits that penetrate the building construction shall be isolated from the building structure by use of Code M pipe seal.

7. Provide flexible pipe connections at all equipment mounted on vibration control products and wherever shown on the drawings.

8. Risers shall be suspended from or supported by Code E hangers or Code C mountings and the piping anchored or guided with Code N anchors. Steel spring deflections shall be a minimum of 0.75 inches except in those expansion locations where additional deflection is required to limit deflection or load changes to plus or minus 25% of the initial stress.


Hope House


C. Ductwork

1. All sheet metal ducts and air plenums that are within mechanical rooms or within a distance of 50' total duct length of connected vibration-isolated equipment (whichever is longer) shall be isolated from the building structure by Code A, fiberglass pads or Code E isolators. All isolators shall achieve 0.1" minimum static deflection.

2. Where lateral support of duct risers is required within the specified limits, this shall be accomplished by use of resilient lateral supports.

3. Ducts within the specified limits that penetrate the building construction shall be isolated from the building by use of resilient penetrating sleeve/seals.

4. Provide flexible duct connections at all equipment mounted on vibration control products and wherever shown on the drawings.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration control materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units have equal deflection, do not bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices intended for temporary support during installation.

B. Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated.

C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where substrate is not level.

D. Install inertia base frames on isolator units as indicated, so that minimum of 1 inch clearance below base will result when frame is filled with concrete and supported equipment has been installed and loaded for operation. Provide concrete for inertia bases.

E. For air handling equipment, install thrust restraints as indicated, and also wherever thrust exceeds 10 percent of equipment weight.

F. Locate isolation hangers as near overhead support structure as possible.

G. Weld riser isolator units in place as required to prevent displacement from loading and operations.

H. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible.

I. General: Provide seismic restraint for all mechanical work required by the 2003 International Building Code (IBC). If force factors greater than those specified below are calculated based on the Code and actual side conditions, the more stringent value shall be used in the project selection. Refer to Structural Engineer/Drawings for information required for the calculation of component seismic force.


Hope House


J. Seismic Restraints – Equipment:

1. Seismic restraint bracing shall be calculated to provide restraint against calculated seismic component force.

2. Floor or pad mounted equipment, without vibration isolators, shall be bolted to the floor or other support.

3. Floor mounted equipment; with vibration isolators shall be provided with lateral and vertical restraining devices on all sides of the base to restrict displacement of the equipment.

4. Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on structural seismic spring isolation curbs. The upper part of the frame shall withstand the wind pressure and seismic forces. The lower part of the frame shall provide seismic attachment and leveling. All seismic curbs and roof rails shall be bolted or anchored/welded to the building steel or through bolted to concrete deck.

5. On all sides of suspended equipment, provide bracing for rigid supports and provide restraints for resiliently supported equipment.

6. snubbers: Each vibration isolated system shall have a minimum of four all-directional seismic snubbers that are double acting and located as close to the vibration isolators as possible to facilitate attachment both to the base and the structure (per 2003 IBC Section 1621.3.1).

7. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment to the structure details and design shall be as indicated on the Structural Drawings.

8. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow development of full drill-in wedge anchor ratings. If cast-in anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and embedment.

K. Seismic Bracing-Piping:

1. All high hazard and lift safety piping, including fuel oil, fire protection, gas piping, medical gas piping, and compressed air piping shall be seismically braced.

2. Cross-brace and lateral brace as detailed in the latest version of SMACNA Publication, “Seismic Restraint Manual-Guidelines for Mechanical Systems” including addenda.

3. Seismic restraint bracing shall be calculated to provide restraint against a force as dictated by IBC 2003.

4. Omit seismic restraints for suspended piping only as allowed by 2003 IBC code.

5. Fastening a rigid piping system to two dissimilar parts of the building that may respond differently, such as a wall and ceiling is prohibited.

6. Water and Steam Piping

a. Provide flexible coupling or expansion joint at each side of building seismic and expansion joint.

b. Provide a mechanical grooved coupling at ceiling of each floor and within 24 inches of bottom of risers.

c. Transverse brace supports shall be at 40 feet on center, maximum. d. Longitudinal brace supports shall be at 80 feet on centers, maximum.


Hope House


7. If applicable, for fuel oil and gas piping, transverse restraints shall be spaced at 20’ (maximum) and longitudinal restraints shall be spaced at 40’ (maximum).

8. Transverse bracing for one pipe section may act as longitudinal bracing for the pipe section connected perpendicular to it, provided the bracing is installed within 24 inches of the elbow or tee and pipes are within one pipe size.

9. Do not use branch lines to brace main lines. 10. Support the weight of the rise above the riser center of gravity per floor.

a. All PVC and glass pipe less than 6” in diameter shall be braced only if they convey hazardous or toxic materials:

11. Provide flexible coupling or expansion joint underground at exterior wall and at each side of building’s seismic and expansion joint.

L. Seismic Bracing – Ductwork

1. Seismic Restraint – Cross brace and lateral brace all ductwork required by the latest edition of SMACNA “Seismic Restraint Manual-Guidelines for Mechanical Systems” including all addenda.

2. Seismic restraint bracing shall be calculated to provide horizontal restraint against force as dictated by 2003 IBC.

3. Provide seismic bracing for all ductwork that serves as a life safety function or carry toxic materials.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Upon completion of vibration and seismic control work, prepare report showing measured equipment deflections for each major item of equipment as indicated.

B. Clean each control unit, and verify that each is working freely, and that there is no dirt or debris in immediate vicinity of unit that could possibly short-circuit unit isolation.

3.6 INSPECTION

A. Perform required independent special and periodic inspections, on compounds, as outlined in Specification Section 001411.

B. Contractor shall provide a written report upon completion of project, certifying that all vibration isolation devices have been installed correctly.

3.7 GUARANTEE

A. If, in the actual installation, any equipment fails to meet the vibration and seismic control requirements specified herein, that equipment shall be corrected or replaced without claim for additional payment, inclusive of all labor and material costs. Such corrective measures shall be done within a time schedule specified by the Owner.



Hope House

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - Page 1

SECTION 230553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Duct labels.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.


Hope House


2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not

less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than

24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with

substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.


2.3 DUCT LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: Yellow


Hope House


D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.


2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.


Hope House


3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal

units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of

concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 10

feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Refrigerant Piping:

a. Background Color: White b. Letter Color: Black

3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

1. Blue For supply and return-air ducts. 2. Yellow Ventilation air supply ducts. 3. Green For exhaust and outside air ducts.


Hope House


B. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction, may be provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 20 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Refrigerant: 1-1/2 inches

2. Valve-Tag Color: a. Refrigerant: Natural

3. Letter Color: Black



Hope House

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - Page 1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary General Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for complete adjusting and balancing Work as required in Contract Documents.

B. This Section specifies the requirements and procedures total, mechanical systems testing, adjusting, and balancing. Requirements included measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results.

C. Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems:

1. Supply air systems. 2. Return air systems. 3. Exhaust air systems.

D. This Section does not include:

1. Testing boilers and pressure vessels for compliance with safety codes; 2. Specifications for materials for patching mechanical systems; 3. Specifications for materials and installation of adjusting and balancing devices. If

devices must be added to achieve proper adjusting and balancing, refer to the respective system sections for materials and installation requirements.

4. Requirements and procedures for piping and ductwork systems leakage tests.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide information in report from listing items required by specification. Report will be typed and three copies submitted for review. Results will be guaranteed. Contractor will be subjected to recall to site to verify report information before acceptance of the report by the Owner’s Representative.


Hope House


B. Report format will consist of the following:

1. Title sheet with job name, contractor, engineer, date, balance contractor’s name, address, telephone number and contact person’s name and the balancing technician’s name.

2. Individual test sheets for air handlers, terminal units, air distribution, exhaust fans, duct traverses, pumps, air handling coils, reheat coils, radiation, convectors, cabinet unit heaters and unit ventilators.

3. Manufacturers pump and fan curves for equipment installed with design and actual operating conditions indicated.

4. One complete set of reproducible record contract drawings single line sketch of systems marked up with terminal unit numbers, room numbers, testports locations, register, grille and diffuser numbers to correlate test sheet. (Number air outlets by room numbers). Data will be provided with reports.

5. Provide commentary of installed systems with respect to deviations from Contract Documents systems performance and craftsmanship of the installation.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. System testing, adjusting, and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting all the building environmental systems to product the design objectives. It includes:

1. The balance of air and water distribution. 2. Adjustment of total system to provide design quantities. 3. Electrical measurement. 4. Verification of performance of all equipment and automatic controls.

B. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment.

C. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment (e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling).

D. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (submains, branches, and terminals) according to specified design quantities.

E. Procedure: Standardize approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield reproducible results.

F. Report forms: Test date sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for submission and review. This data should also form the permanent record to be used as the basis for required future testing, adjusting and balancing.

G. Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system. There are supply inlets on water terminals, supply outlets on air terminals, return outlets on water terminals, and exhaust or return supply or outside air inlets or outlets on terminals such as registers, grilles, diffusers, and louvers.

H. Main: Duct or pipe containing the system’s major or entire fluid flow.


Hope House


I. Submain: Duct or pipe containing part of the systems’ capacity and serving two or more branch mains.

J. Branch Main: Duct or pipe serving two or more terminals.

K. Branch: Duct or pipe serving a signal terminal.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Follow procedures and methods published by one or more of the following:

1. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB).

2. Individual manufacturer requirements and recommendations.

B. Maintain qualified person at project for system operation, trouble shooting, change pulleys and perform mechanical adjustments in conjunction with balancing procedure.

C. Balancing contractor will be current member of AABC, NEBB or approved by the Engineer.

1.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Before concealment of systems, visit the job site to verify and advise on type and location of balancing devices and test points. Make changes as required to balancing facilities.

B. Place systems in satisfactory operating condition.

1. Adjusting and balancing will be accomplished as soon as the system is complete and before Owner takes possession.

2. Prior to balancing adjust balancing devices for full flow, fill, vent and clean hydronic systems, replace temporary filters and strainers.

3. Initial adjustment and balancing to quantities as called for or as directed by the engineer, to satisfy job conditions.

4. Adjusting and balancing will be accomplished under appropriate outdoor temperature conditions. All outdoor conditions (DB, Wb, and a description of the weather conditions) at the time of testing will be documented in the report.

5. Change pulleys as required to meet system performance requirements. Adjust and align pulleys, to obtain proper settings and operation.

6. Replace balancing cocks, flow balancers and dampers in new systems that cannot be manipulated to satisfy balancing requirements.

7. Identify flow balancers, balancing cocks and dampers in existing systems that cannot be manipulated to satisfy balancing requirements.

8. Traverse main ducts to determine total system air quantities after all outlets have been set prior to final adjustment if the system does not meet design requirements. A sum of room CFMs is not acceptable.


Hope House


1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner’s operations.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment. HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC’s “National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems” forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:

B. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:

1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents.

2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide tools, ladders, recording meters, gauges, thermometers, velometers, anemometers, Pitot tube, inclined gauge manometers, magnehelic gauges, amprobes, voltmeters, phychrometers and tachometers required. Instruments used will be accurately calibrated as per AABC or NEBB requirements.


Hope House


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems’ designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

1. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents.”

D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems’ output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, “Fans and Systems,” Section 7 through 10; or in SMACNA’s “HVAC Systems-Duct Design,” Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine system and equipment test reports.

H. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

I. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.


Hope House


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC’s “National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems”, NEBB’s “Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems”, and this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.

C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

3.4 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

3.5 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.


Hope House


B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:

1. Fan curves. 2. Manufacturer’s test data. 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 4. Other information relative to equipment performance, including, but not limited to:

a. cfm b. s.p. c. rpm d. Amps (nameplate and actual) e. hp f. Voltage (nameplate and actual)

3.6 AIR SIDE

A. Test, adjust and record the following:

1. AHU: Fan coil units, air handling units, rooftop packaged air conditioning units. Variable air volume boxes (in both minimum O.A. and economizer mods), exhaust fans:

a. Minimum outdoor air Cfm. b. Total discharge and return Cfm. c. Static profile thru unit. d. Complete nameplate data.

2. Coils:

a. Entering air temperature (DB/WB). b. Leaving air temperature (DB/WB). c. Static differential. d. Face velocity and area. e. Cfm. f. Complete nameplate data.

3. Registers/Grilles/diffusers:

a. Cfm (within 10%). b. Set, adjust and record air flow pattern.

4. Filter Banks:

a. Nameplate data. b. Static pressure drop.


Hope House


3.7 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.



October 10,2017

Hope House

MECHANICAL INSULATION 230713 – Page 1

SECTION 230713 - MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary


B. Requirements of the following Division 23 Sections apply to this section:

1. "Basic HVAC Requirements."

2. "Basic HVAC Materials and Methods."

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Extent of mechanical insulation required by this section is indicated on drawings and

schedules, and by requirements of this section.

B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following:

1. Piping System Insulation:

a. Fiberglass

b. Cellular Glass

c. Calcium Silicate

d. Flexible Unicellular

2. Ductwork System Insulation:

a. Fiberglass.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this

Section.

1. Division 23 Section "Supports and Anchors" for protection saddles, protection

shields, and thermal hanger shields; not work of this section.

2. Division 23 Section "Metal Ductwork" for duct linings; not work of this section.

3. Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification" for installation of identification

devices for piping, ductwork, and equipment; not work of this section.


October 10,2017

Hope House


1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions

for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product

number, k-value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system

requiring insulation.


A. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on

projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project.

B. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets,

coverings, sealers, mastic and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and

smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.



B. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with

manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products.

C. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not

install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the

following:

1. ArmaCell

2. Babcock & Wilcox; Insulating Products Div.

3. CertainTeed Manson.

4. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.

5. Johns Manville

6. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.

7. Pittsburgh Corning Corp.

8. Rubatex Corp.


October 10,2017

Hope House


2.2 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cellular Glass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2.

C. Flexible Unicellular Piping Insulation: ASTM C 534, Type I.

D. Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C 1136, Type I for piping with temperatures below

ambient, Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all

piping at Installers option.

1. Encase fiberglass and calcium silicate pipe fittings insulation with one-piece pre-

molded PVC fitting covers, fastened as per manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Encase all exposed pipe insulation outdoors with PVC pipe covers.

a. Thickness shall be 20 mil. with weatherproof construction.

b. Bond all PVC seams in occupied rooms with polyco VP adhesive, or

equal. Bond adhesive shall conform to ASTM D-2654.

E. Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for

applications indicated.

F. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation

manufacturer for applications indicated.

G. Removable/Reusable Insulation Valve Covers: Two piece, silicone impregnated finish,

Type E glass fiber insulation. Multiglas Products Co., MULTI COV-R, or approved

equal.

2.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Rigid Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 1, 6 LBS/FT3

B. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type I, Class B-4, 1.5 LBS/FT3.

C. Jackets for Ductwork Insulation: Foil-Skrim-Kraft (FSK) ASTM C 1136, Type I for

ductwork with temperatures below ambient; Type II for ductwork with temperatures

above ambient.

D. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, tape, anchors, corner angles

and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications

indicated.

E. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers,

protective finishes and similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer

for applications indicated.


October 10,2017

Hope House


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do

not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner

acceptable to Installer.

3.2 HVAC PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION

A. Cold Piping (below 40 deg. F) Application Requirements: Insulate the following sub-

freezing HVAC piping systems:

1. Refrigerant suction lines and liquid.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and

thicknesses of insulation:

a. Fiberglass: 0.5” 1/2 inch thick

b. Flexible Unicellular: 1-1-2 inch thick.

B. Cold Piping (40 degree F to ambient) Application Requirements: Insulate the following

cold HVAC piping systems:

1. Hot water/snow melting systems.

2. Cooling Tower water supply and return piping – above roof.

3. HVAC make-up water piping.

4. Air conditioner condensate drain piping.

5. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and

thicknesses of insulation:

a. Fiberglass: 0.5 inch thick for condensate drain,0.5 inch thick for pipe

sizes up to and including 1 inch, 1-inch thick for 1.5 inch and larger.

NOTE: Piping above roof insulation to be 2” thickness.

C. Hot Low Pressure Piping (to 250 deg. F). Above Ground Application

Requirements: Insulate the following hot low pressure HVAC piping systems

(steam piping up to 15 psi, water piping up to 250 deg. F).

1. HVAC hot water (glycol) supply and return piping.

2. Hot gas refrigerant piping.

3. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following

types and thicknesses of insulation:

a. Fiberglass:

1) Hot Water: 1-1 ½ inch thick for pipe sizes up to and

including 1-1 ¼ inch, 2 inch thick for pipe 1-1/2 inch up to

and including 6 inch.

D. Heat trace all piping above roof.


October 10,2017

Hope House


3.3 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION

A. Ductwork Application Requirements: Insulate the following ductwork:

1. Outdoor air intake ductwork between air entrance and fan inlet or HVAC unit

inlet.

2. HVAC supply ductwork between fan discharge, or HVAC unit discharge, and

room terminal outlet. (Unless otherwise noted).

3. HVAC return ductwork in mechanical equipment rooms or installed outdoors and

attic space.

4. HVAC plenums and unit housings not pre-insulated at factory or lined.

5. Exhaust fan and gravity relief plenums and ductwork.

6. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types

and thicknesses of insulation:

HVAC Supply/Return Ductwork:

a. Rigid Fiberglass: 2 inch thick, for indoor exposed ductwork; 3 inch thick

for exterior ductwork.

b. Flexible Fiberglass: 2 inch thick, application limited to indoor concealed

locations, and attic space.

Exhaust Ductwork:

a. 1.5” thickness flexible fiberglass in Attic space.

B. Ductwork penetrating 2-hour fire separation; provide fire rated insulation where indicated

and as required to maintain fire rating integrity.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION

A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that

insulation serves its intended purpose.

B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting,

testing, and acceptance of tests.

C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run

of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not

use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.

D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to

ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent

puncture or other damage.


October 10,2017

Hope House


F. Cover valves, fittings, air separators and all other piping system components in each

piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to

adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's

option) except where specific form or type is indicated.

G. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping

penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

H. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3 inch

wide vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of

vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3 inch wide vapor barrier tape

or band.

I. Provide removable valve covers for valves which must be accessed periodically.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that

insulation serves its intended purpose.

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.

C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure

complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

D. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent

puncture and other damage.

E. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork

penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

F. Lined Ductwork: Except as otherwise indicated, omit insulation on ductwork where

internal insulation or sound absorbing linings have been installed. Exception - Attic

Space.

G. Corner Angles: Install corner angles on external corners of insulation on ductwork in

exposed finished spaces before covering with jacketing.

3.6 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with

vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.

B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for

insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and

deterioration.


October 10,2017

Hope House


3.7 OUTDOOR INSULATION FINISH

A. General: Piping, ductwork and equipment exposed to weather shall have insulation

protective finish or jacketing installed as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Piping: Shall have aluminum jacket with moisture barrier with locking longitudinal seam

and butt straps. Fittings, valves, flanges, etc. shall have factory or job fabricated

aluminum cover secured with banding and or screws.

C. Round Ductwork: Same finish as piping.

D. Rectangular Ductwork and Equipment: Shall have laminated jacketed system

Alumaguard 60 by Polyguard Products, Inc. or approved equal. The laminated jacketing

system shall be 60 mil thick, and shall consist of a rubberized bitumen compound, heat

applied to a cross-laminated high strength polyethylene film, laminated to aluminum foil.

E. Exterior ductwork shall be insulated in accordance with this Section with the finish

specified.

F. Alternate exterior duct system as manufactured by “Thermaduct” does not require field

applied finishes. Installation per manufacturers’ installation manual.



Hope House

REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 – Page 1

SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Refrigerant pipes and fittings. 2. Refrigerant piping valves and specialties. 3. Refrigerants.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve, refrigerant piping, and refrigerant piping specialty.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show piping size and piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.

2. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

B. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."


Hope House


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig. 2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig. 3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.


A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket fittings on copper pipe.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

F. Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Socket ends. 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-

inch-long assembly. 4. Working Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

2.3 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Danfoss Inc. b. Heldon Products; Henry Technologies. c. Parker Hannifin Corp. d. Paul Mueller Company.

2. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or angle pattern.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=9926

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457058462





Hope House


3. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring. 4. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel. 5. Seat: Nylon. 6. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged. 7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

B. Packed-Angle Valves:



2. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze. 3. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure. 4. Operator: Rising stem. 5. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene. 6. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap. 7. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

C. Check Valves:


a. Danfoss Inc. b. Emerson Climate Technologies. c. Heldon Products; Henry Technologies. d. Parker Hannifin Corp. e. Paul Mueller Company.

2. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.

3. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug. 4. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat. 5. Closing Spring: Stainless steel. 6. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal. 7. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. 8. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig. 9. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.












Hope House


D. Service Valves:


a. Danfoss Inc. b. Emerson Climate Technologies. c. Heldon Products; Henry Technologies. d. Parker Hannifin Corp. e. Paul Mueller Company. f. Refrigeration Sales, Inc.

2. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.

3. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring. 4. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 5. End Connections: Copper spring. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.

E. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL.



2. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal. 3. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 4. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 5. End Connections: Threaded. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

F. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with AHRI 750.


a. Danfoss Inc. b. Emerson Climate Technologies. c. Heldon Products; Henry Technologies. d. Paul Mueller Company.

2. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel. 3. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 4. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos. 5. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.



















Hope House


6. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F. 7. Superheat: Adjustable. 8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union. 9. Working Pressure Rating: 450 psig.

G. Straight-Type Strainers:


a. Danfoss Inc. b. Heldon Products; Henry Technologies. c. Parker Hannifin Corp.

2. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating. 3. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel. 4. End Connections: Socket or flare. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

H. Angle-Type Strainers:

1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze. 2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug. 3. Screen: 100-mesh monel. 4. End Connections: Socket or flare. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

I. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:

1. Body: Forged brass. 2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element

protected by filter screen. 3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in parts per million (ppm). 4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm. 5. End Connections: Socket or flare. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

2.4 REFRIGERANTS

A. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.






Hope House


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A

A. Suction Lines: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.

B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type ACR, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.

C. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type ACR, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.

3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.

B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.

C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor suction connection.

D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves on inlet and outlet side of filter dryers.

E. Install a full-size, three-valve bypass around filter dryers.

F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.

1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. 2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb

straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line. 3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect

suction-line pressure at bulb location.

H. Install safety relief valves where required by 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.

I. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.


Hope House


J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an integral assembly for the device being protected:

1. Solenoid valves. 2. Thermostatic expansion valves. 3. Hot-gas bypass valves. 4. Compressor.

K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve.

L. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge.

M. Install flexible connectors at compressors.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.


F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

J. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings.

K. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels as specified in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.


Hope House


L. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.

M. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury.

N. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

O. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb.

P. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation.

Q. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube."

1. Use Type BCuP (copper-phosphorus) alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe.

2. Use Type BAg (cadmium-free silver) alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.


Hope House


3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.

2. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 3. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact

with copper pipe.

C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod, 1/4 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod, 3/8 inch. 8. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod, 3/8 inch. 9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod, 1/2 inch.

D. Support multi-floor vertical runs at least at each floor.



1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. 2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor,

condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure.

3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure. b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout

duration of test. c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small

amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints. d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory

results are achieved.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.


Hope House


3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If

vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig. 4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit. 2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct. 3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. 4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes. 5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and

bearings.

E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established.



Hope House

METAL DUCTS 233113 - Page 1

SECTION 233113 – METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Duct liner. 5. Sealants and gaskets. 6. Hangers and supports.


1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible".


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. 3. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

a. Penthouse coordination drawings.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure

classes.


Hope House


4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access

doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and

vibration isolation.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Field quality-control reports.


Hope House



A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum

supports. 3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."


Hope House


2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.








Hope House


B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.4 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."


a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning.

2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.

3. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.

a. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

b. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.







Hope House


2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick aluminum with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure

butted-edge overlapping. 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners

of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.

6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.

7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:

a. Fan discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher

than 2500 fpm or where indicated.

9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.

a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent.

10. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.


Hope House


2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 3 inches 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),

stainless steel, or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),

stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


Hope House


7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated

couplings and fitting spigots.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc

chromate.


Hope House


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.


Hope House


B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

F. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and

Lower: Seal Class B. 6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch

wg: Seal Class A.

7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower:

Seal Class C. 10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch

wg: Seal Class B.

11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.


Hope House


2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.

4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."



B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test.


Hope House


2. Test the following systems:

a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.

4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system

or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness

according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.


Hope House


2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling

supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling

plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if

fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

3.9 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."


Hope House


3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Furnaces

a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A

c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24

d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 1

2. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units

a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.

c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24

d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12

B. Return Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Furnaces

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24 d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12

2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units :

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24 d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12

C. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive

pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24 d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12

D. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel


Hope House


E. Liner:

1. Supply Air Ducts for cooling and heating, for first 5 feet from unit outlet: Natural fiber, 1 inch thick.

2. Return Air Ducts where indicated: Natural fiber, 1 inch thick. 3. Transfer Ducts: Natural fiber 1 inch thick.

F. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.

1) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam

G. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.



Hope House

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - Page 1

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Fire dampers. 4. Combination fire and smoke dampers. 5. Flange connectors. 6. Turning vanes. 7. Duct-mounted access doors. 8. Flexible connectors. 9. Air Terminal – VAV Units 10. Flexible ducts.


1. Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for duct-mounted fire and smoke detectors.



1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.

B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Control-damper installations. d. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling,

and corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors and remote damper operators.

e. Duct security bars. f. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


Hope House



A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.

B. Source quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inchminimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches


Hope House


2.3 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.

3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.

4. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

5. Lloyd Industries, Inc.

6. Nailor Industries Inc.

7. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.

8. Pottorff.

9. Ruskin Company.

10. Vent Products Company, Inc.

C. Description: Gravity balanced.

D. Maximum Air Velocity: 1000 fpm

E. Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg

F. Frame: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel] 0.063-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel with welded corners or mechanically attached and mounting flange].

G. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center pivoted maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inch-thick, roll-formed aluminum with sealed edges.

H. Blade Action: Parallel.

I. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked.

J. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Aluminum.

2. Diameter: 0.20 inch

K. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

L. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

M. Bearings: synthetic pivot bushings.

N. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2. Electric actuators.


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456821227&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd











Hope House


3. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.

a. Sleeve Thickness: 20 gageminimum.

b. Sleeve Length: 6 inchesminimum.

4. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.

5. Screen Material: Aluminum.

6. Screen Type: Bird

7. 90-degree stops.

2.4 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:


a. McGill AirFlow LLC. b. Nailor Industries Inc. c. Ruskin Company. d. Tampco

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.

3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

4. Frames:

a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

7. Bearings:

a. Molded synthetic. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have

axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.





Hope House


B. Jackshaft:

1. Size: 1-inch diameter. 2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted

on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. 3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each

damper in multiple-damper assembly.

C. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.

2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.

3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.5 FIRE DAMPERS



1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

a. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.

b. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.

c. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

d. Nailor Industries Inc.

e. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.

f. Pottorff. g. Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc.

h. Ruskin Company.

i. Vent Products Company, Inc.

j. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

C. Type: Static rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.

D. Fire Rating: 2 hours.

E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch-thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application.

2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements.














Hope House


G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.024-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch-thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated fusible links.

2.6 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS


1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 4. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 5. Nailor Industries Inc. 6. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. 7. Pottorff. 8. Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc. 9. Ruskin Company. 10. Vent Products Company, Inc. 11. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S by an NRTL.

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity.

D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

E. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded or mechanically attached corners and mounting flange.

F. Heat-Responsive Device: Electric resettable device and switch package, factory installed, rated.

G. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.

H. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel.

I. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.

J. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.05-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application.

K. Master control panel for use in dynamic smoke-management systems.














Hope House


L. Damper Motors: Modulating or two-position action.

M. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC."

3. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear trains.

4. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf.

5. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F.

6. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.

7. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.

N. Accessories:

1. Momentary test switch, damper mounted.

2.7 FLANGE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Description: Roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

C. Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.





Hope House


2.8 TURNING VANES


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Elgen Manufacturing. 4. METALAIRE, Inc. 5. SEMCO Incorporated. 6. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

D. Vane Construction: Double wall.

2.9 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS



1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 4. Elgen Manufacturing. 5. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 6. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 7. McGill AirFlow LLC. 8. Nailor Industries Inc. 9. Pottorff. 10. Ventfabrics, Inc. 11. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.




















Hope House


C. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for

duct pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inchbutt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.

b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Continuous and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression

latches with outside handles.

2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

a. Duro Dyne Inc. b. Elgen Manufacturing. c. Ventfabrics, Inc. d. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.







Hope House


2.11 AIR TERMINAL – VAV UNITS

A. FLE Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air terminals of one of the following:

1. Daikin. 2. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc. 3. Trane. 4. Price.

B. General: Provide factory-fabricated and tested air terminals as indicated, selected with performance characteristics which match or exceed those indicated on schedule. Terminals to be certified under ARI Std. 880-89 and carry ARI seal.

C. Casings: Construct of die-cast aluminum or sheet metal of the following minimum thicknesses: Steel 22 gauge, Aluminum 0.032 inches.

D. Provide hanger brackets for attachment of supports.

E. Linings: Line inside surfaces of casings with non-porous, sealed lining material to provide acoustic performance, thermal insulation and to prevent condensation on outside surfaces of casing. Provide minimum thickness of 3/4 inch thick, 4 pounds per cubic foot insulation manufactured in accordance with UL Standard No. 181 and NFPA 90A. All cut edges must be sealed to prevent erosion and all edges in the unit discharge section must be secured with metal brackets. Liner cover shall be scrim stitched, reinforced aluminum foil, or equal. Liner covers made from Mylar, Tedlar, Silane or woven fiberglass are not acceptable.

F. Leakage: Construct casings such that when subjected to 0.5-inch w.g. pressure for low pressure units, and 3-inch w.g. pressure for high pressure units, total leakage does not exceed 4 percent of specified air flow capacity with outlets sealed and inlets wide open. Construct air dampers such that when subjected to 6.0 inch w.g. inlet pressure with damper closed, total leakage does not exceed 10 percent of specified air flow capacity.

G. Air Dampers: Construct of materials that cannot corrode, do not require lubrication, nor require periodic servicing. Provide maximum volume dampers, both pressure dependent and pressure compensated, that are calibrated in cfm. Provide mechanism to vary air volume through damper for minimum to maximum, in response from signal from thermostat.

H. Flow Sensor: The unit inlet shall be equipped with a cross-shaped or full perimeter flow sensor with amplifying pressure pickup points connected to central avenaging chambers. The sensor shall amplify the duct velocity pressure by a factor of 1.75 and shall maintain control accuracy with the same size inlet duct in any configuration. The flow sensor shall ensure accurate air delivery within +/- 5 percent of the factory set air volume under all conditions, independent of system static pressure.

I. Identification: Provide label on each unit indicating Plan Number, cfm range.

J. Factory Mounted Controls: Provide factory furnished controls compatible with the associated with the RTU’s packaged controls.


Hope House


2.12 FEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Non-insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.

C. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. 4. Insulation R-value: R-4.2.

D. Flexible Duct Connectors:

E. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft and control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.





Hope House


D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.

H. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

I. Install fire dampers according to UL listing.

J. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

K. Connect diffusers with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

L. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.

M. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed. 3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.



October 10, 2017

Hope House

FANS AND VENTILATORS 233423 - Page 1

SECTION 233423 - FANS AND VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of air-handling equipment:

1. Inline Centrifugal ventilators.

2. Inline Centrifugal ventilators.

3. Energy Recovery ventilators.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:

1. Division 23 Section "Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for

vibration hangers and supports.

2. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air-handling systems

testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements and procedures.

3. Division 26 Section "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for disconnect

switches.

C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include roof curbs for roof-

mounted exhaust fans.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories, and the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound power ratings.

3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories.

4. Materials gauges and finishes, including color charts.

5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

C. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

dimensions, weights, required clearances, components, and location and size of field

connections.


October 10, 2017

Hope House



A. UL Compliance: Fans shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with

UL 705 "Power Ventilators."

B. UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled.

C. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Fans and

components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in

OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA

standards.

E. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70

"National Electrical Code."



1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Fans and Ventilators, General:

a. Cook

b. Greenheck Fan Corp.

c. Penn Ventilator

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required:

1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for

Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data". Test fans in


October 10, 2017

Hope House


accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating". Fans shall

be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal.

2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density,

speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with

AMCA Standard 210/ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory Methods of Testing

Fans for Rating.

2.3 FANS, GENERAL

A. General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and

factory finished, with indicated capacities and characteristics.

B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous

operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower.

1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more

than 70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the

fan's class.

C. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after

installation.

1. Service Factor: 1.5 for motors up to 5 HP, 1.2 for motors 7-1/2 HP and larger.

D. Belts: Oil-resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic.

E. Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 HP;

fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 15 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment

is at the middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.

1. Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the

fan cabinet.

F. Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median life "Rating Life" (AFBMA L 50)

of 200,000, calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and

AFBMA Standard 11 for roller bearings.

G. Factory Finish: The following finishes are required:

1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coating prior to final assembly.

2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.

2.4 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. General Description: Direct-drive as indicated, centrifugal consisting of housing, wheel,

motor and disconnect switch, curb base, and accessories.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


B. Housing: Heavy-gauge, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square,

one-piece, hinged, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.

1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air

upward, with rain and snow drains.

2. Downblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air

downward.

C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

D. Motor:

1. Provide with variable speed motor with unit mounted or remote potentiometer

speed control dial. Mount in mechanical.

E. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated (Refer to floor plan

schedules):

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, (with internal motor thermal overload

protection mounted inside fan housing), factory-wired through an internal

aluminum conduit.

2. Fan Hinge Kit.

3. Bird Screens: Removable 1/2-inch mesh, 16-gauge, aluminum or brass wire.

4. Dampers: Motor operated or counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft

dampers mounted in curb base, factory set to close when fan stops – see

schedule for requirements.

5. Blades: Die-formed sheet aluminum.

6. Frame: Extruded aluminum, with waterproof, felt blade seals.

7. Linkage: Nonferrous metals, connecting blades to counter weight or operator.

8. Roof Curbs: Prefabricated, heavy-gauge, galvanized steel; mitered and welded

corners; 2-inch-thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; built-in

cant and mounting flange for flat roof decks; and 2-inch wood nailer. Size as

required to suit roof opening and fan base. Overall height - 12 inch. Verify roof

pitch for slope roofs.

9. Low voltage cooling thermostat set to 80 degrees (adjustable).

10. 7-day programmable time clock.

2.5 INLINE CENTRIFUGAL VENTILATORS.

A. General Description: Inline centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet

guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor, mounting brackets, and

accessories.

B. Housing: Split, spun-aluminum housing, with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet

and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling

mounting.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory-wired to

disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing.

D. Belt-Drive Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves,

enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings

extended to outside of fan housing.

E. Wheel: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.

F. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:

1. NEMA premium efficient motor – meet NEMA Table 12-12.

2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.

3. Fan Guards: Expanded metal in removable frame.

4. Two removable access panels of size to allow full access to all interior

components.

5. Low voltage adjustable cooling thermostat set to 80 degree.

2.6 ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATORS

A. General Description:

1. Energy Recovery Ventilator (ERV) shall be a packaged unit with blowers

with controls and shall transfer both heat and humidity using static plate

core technology. The energy recovery cores used in these products shall

be third party Certified by AHRI under its Standard 1060 for Energy

Recovery Ventilators. AHRI published certifications shall confirm

manufacture’s published performance for airflow, static pressure,

temperature and total effectiveness, purge air (OACF) and exhaust air

leakage (EATR). Products that are not currently AHRI Certified will not be

accepted. Manufacturer shall be able to provide evidence of independent

testing of the core by Underwriters Laboratory (UL), verifying a maximum

flame spread index (FSI) of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index

(SDI) of 50 thereby meeting NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B requirements for

materials in a compartment handling air intended for circulation through a

duct system. The method of test shall be UL Standard 723. Unit shall be

listed under UL 1812 Standard for Ducted Air to Air Heat Exchangers.

Some exceptions to UL Listing may apply. The ERV core shall be

warranted to be free of manufacturing defects and to retain its functional

characteristics, under circumstances of normal use, for a period of ten

years from the date of purchase. The balance-of-unit shall be warranted to

be free of manufacturing defects and to retain its functional characteristics,

under circumstances of normal use, for a period of two years from the date

of purchase.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


B. Performance

1. Energy Transfer

a. The ERV shall be capable of transferring both sensible and latent

energy between airstreams. Latent energy transfer shall be

accomplished by direct water vapor transfer from one airstream to

the other, without exposing transfer media in succeeding cycles

directly to the exhaust air and then to the fresh air.

2. Passive Frost Control

a. The ERV Core shall perform without condensing or frosting under

normal conditions.

3. Continuous Ventilation

a. Unit shall have the capacity to operate continuously without the

need for bypass, recirculation, preheaters or defrost cycles under

normal conditions.

4. Positive Airstream Separation

a. Water vapor transfer shall be through molecular transport by

hydroscopic resin and shall not be accomplished by “porous plate”

mechanisms. Exhaust and fresh airstreams shall travel at all times

in separate passages, and airstreams shall not mix.

5. Laminar Flow

a. Airflow through the ERV core shall be laminar over the products

entire operating airflow range, avoiding deposition of particulates on

the interior of the energy exchange plate material.

C. Construction

1. The energy recovery component shall be of fixed-plate cross-flow

construction, with no moving parts.

2. The unit case shall be constructed of G90 galvanized, 20-gauge steel, with

lapped corners and zinc plated screw fasteners.

3. Access doors shall provide easy access to blowers, ERV cores, and filters.

Doors shall have an airtight compression seal using closed cell foam

gaskets. Pressure taps, with captive plugs, shall be provided allowing

cross-core pressure measurement allowing for accurate airflow

measurement.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


4. Case walls and doors shall be insulated with 1 inch, 4 pound density,

foil/scrim faced, high-density fiberglass board insulation, providing a

cleanable surface and eliminating the possibility of exposing the fresh air to

glass fibers, and with minimum R-value of 4.3 (hr•ft2•°F/BTU).

5. The ERV cores shall be protected by a MERV-8 rated, 2” nominal, pleated,

disposable filter in both airstreams.

6. Unit shall have single-point power connection and a single-point 24 VAC

contactor control connection.

7. Blower motors shall be Premium Efficiency, EISA compliant for energy

efficiency. The blower motors shall be totally enclosed (TEFC). Direct drive

fans and motors shall be EISA-compliant for energy efficiency with open

drip proof design and integral thermal protection.

8. Blowers shall be backward incline type.

9. The unit electrical box shall include a factory installed, non-fused

disconnect switch and a 24 VAC, Class II transformer/relay package.

D. Options and Accessories

1. Provide unit and duct connection orientation per project schedule.

2. Provide vibration isolators.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements

for installation tolerances, housekeeping pads, and other conditions affecting

performance of fans.

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install fans and ventilators level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions. Support units as described below, using the vibration control devices

indicated. Vibration control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration

Controls."


October 10, 2017

Hope House


1. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.

2. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 07.

B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service

and maintenance.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 23 sections. Make final

duct connections with flexible connections.

B. Electrical Connections: The following requirements apply:

1. Electrical power wiring is specified in Division 26.

2. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National

Electrical Code.

3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust.

Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.

3.5 COMMISSIONING

A. Final Checks Before Start-Up: Perform the following operations and checks before start-

up:

1. Remove shipping blocking and bracing.

2. Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections

for piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify proper thermal overload

protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.

3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.

4. Verify manual and automatic volume control and that fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in the full-open position.

B. Starting procedures for fans:

1. Energize motor: Verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.

2. Adjust fan to indicated RPM.

3. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.

C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature control operators.

D. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for air-

handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


END OF SECTION


October 10, 2017

Hope House

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 233713 - Page 1

SECTION 233713 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 - GENERAL







1.2 SUMMARY

A. Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by

requirements of this section.

B. Types of air outlets and inlets required for project include the following:

1. Supply air diffusers.

2. Supply air registers and grilles.

3. Return and exhaust air registers.

C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this

Section:

1. Other Division 23 sections for ductwork and duct accessories required in

conjunction with air outlets and inlets; not work of this section.

2. Other Division 23 sections for balancing of air outlets and inlets; not work of this

section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 890

"Rating of Air Diffusers and Air Diffuser Assemblies."


October 10, 2017

Hope House


2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with

ASHRAE Standard 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of

Outlets and Inlets."

3. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A

"Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."



B. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers.

Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid

crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Unless otherwise indicated, subject to compliance with requirements,

provide products by one of the following:

1. Diffuser, Grilles, Registers

a. Anemostat Products Div.; Dynamics Corp. of America.

b. Price.

c. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc.

d. Carnes.

2.2 AIR DEVICES

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard air devices

where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and

components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.

B. Performance: Provide air supply devices that have, as minimum, temperature and

velocity traverses, throw and drop, pressure drop and noise criteria ratings for each size

device as listed in manufacturer's current data. Provide air return devices that have, as

a minimum, pressure drop and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in

manufacturer's current data.

C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide air devices with border styles that are compatible with

adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module

with accurate fit and adequate support. Provide drop face type air devices where drop

face ceiling tile is indicated. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications

for types of ceiling systems which will contain each type of ceiling air devices.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


D. Wall Compatibility: Provide air devices with border styles that are compatible with

adjacent wall systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into wall construction

with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and

specifications for type of wall air device.

E. Refer to schedule on drawing for all devices.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do

not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products

serve intended functions.

B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to

interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work.

C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction

"Reflected Ceiling Plans". Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of

acoustical ceiling modules.

D. Securely fasten with edge gaskets all surface mounted flange type diffusers, registers

and grilles to ductwork or ceilings. Draw air devices tight to finished surface to prevent

leakage and smudging.

E. Carefully align, mate and snugly fit butted lengths of linear diffusers.



Hope House

GAS-FIRED FURNACES 235416.13 - Page 1

SECTION 235416.13 - GAS-FIRED FURNACES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Gas-fired, condensing furnaces and accessories complete with controls. 2. Air filters.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.



1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace the following components of furnaces that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period:

1. Warranty Period, Commencing on Date of Substantial Completion:

a. Furnace Heat Exchanger: 10 years. b. Integrated Ignition and Blower Control Circuit Board: Five years. c. Draft-Inducer Motor: Five years.


Hope House


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. General Requirements for Noncondensing Gas-Fired Furnaces: Factory assembled, piped, wired, and tested; complying with ANSI Z21.47/CSA 2.3 and NFPA 54.

2.2 GAS-FIRED FURNACES, CONDENSING


1. Trane 2. YORK; a Johnson Controls company. 3. Lennox Industries, Inc.; Lennox International.

B. Cabinet: Galvanized steel.

1. Cabinet interior around heat exchanger shall be factory-installed insulation. 2. Lift-out panels shall expose burners and all other items requiring access for

maintenance. 3. Factory paint external cabinets in manufacturer's standard color. 4. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

C. Fan: Centrifugal, factory balanced, resilient mounted, direct drive.

1. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2. Special Motor Features: Single speed, premium efficiency, as defined in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment," and with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.

3. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.

4. Special Motor Features: Electronically controlled motor (ECM) controlled by integrated furnace/blower control.

D. Type of Gas: Natural.

E. Heat Exchanger:

1. Primary: Aluminized steel. 2. Secondary: Stainless steel.




Hope House


F. Burner:

1. Gas Valve: 100 percent safety redundant single stage gas valve, main shutoff valve, pressure regulator, safety pilot with electronic flame sensor, limit control, transformer, and combination ignition/fan timer control board.

2. 2-Stage gas heating valve. 3. Ignition: Electric pilot ignition, with hot-surface igniter or electric spark ignition. 4. 95% AFUE.

G. Gas-Burner Safety Controls:

1. Electronic Flame Sensor: Prevents gas valve from opening until pilot flame is proven; stops gas flow on ignition failure.

2. Flame Rollout Switch: Installed on burner box; prevents burner operation. 3. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting; de-energizes burner on

excessive bonnet temperature; automatic reset.

H. Combustion-Air Inducer: Centrifugal fan with thermally protected motor and sleeve bearings prepurges heat exchanger and vents combustion products; pressure switch prevents furnace operation if combustion-air inlet or flue outlet is blocked.

I. Furnace Controls: Solid-state board integrates ignition, heat, cooling, and fan speeds; adjustable fan-on and fan-off timing; terminals for connection to accessories.

J. Accessories:

1. Combination Combustion-Air Intake and Vent Concentric Kit: CPVC plastic fitting to combine combustion-air inlet and vent through roof.

2. Condensate Naturalization kit.

3. Equipment shall be EPA “Energy Star Certified”.

4. Drip pan with audible float alarm.

5. Neoprene isolation pads secure to the underside of the unit enclosure. 6. CPVC Plastic Vent Materials:

a. CPVC Plastic Pipe: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM F 441/F 441M. b. CPVC Plastic Fittings: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM F 438, socket

type. c. CPVC Solvent Cement: ASTM F 493.

K. Capacities and Characteristics: Refer to schedule on Drawings

2.3 THERMOSTATS

A. Controls shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, "Controls."

B. Solid-State Thermostat: Wall-mounted, programmable, microprocessor-based unit with automatic switching from heating to cooling, preferential rate control, seven-day


Hope House


programmability with minimum of four temperature presets per day, vacation mode, and battery backup protection against power failure for program settings.

C. Control Wiring: Unshielded twisted-pair cabling.

1. No. 24 AWG, 100 ohm, four pair. 2. Cable Jacket Color: Blue.

2.4 AIR FILTERS


1. Aprilaire; Research Products Corp. 2. Filtrete Home Filtration Products; a 3M brand. 3. General Filters, Inc. 4. Permatron Corporation.

B. Disposable Filters: 1-inch thick fiberglass media with ASHRAE 52.2 MERV rating of 6 or higher, in sheet metal frame.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install gas-fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent features and systems according to NFPA 54.

B. Base-Mounted Units: Secure units to substrate. Provide optional bottom closure base if required by installation conditions.

C. Controls: Install thermostats at mounting height of 60 inches above floor.

D. Wiring Method: Install control wiring in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal control wiring except in unfinished spaces.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Gas piping installation requirements are specified in Section 221133 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Connect gas piping with union or flange and appliance connector valve.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.







Hope House


C. Vent and Outside-Air Connection, Condensing, Gas-Fired Furnaces: Connect plastic piping vent material to furnace connections and extend outdoors. Terminate vent outdoors with a cap and in an arrangement that will protect against entry of birds, insects, and dirt.

1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings

before assembly. 3. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe

and fittings according to the following:

a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

b. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M, Appendix. c. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785 PVC pipe and

PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

4. Slope pipe vent back to furnace or to outside terminal.

D. Connect ducts to furnace with flexible connector. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."



1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and test for leaks.

Repair leaks, replace lost refrigerant, and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to

confirm proper operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements. 4. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or

binding. 5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

B. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure.



Hope House

GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS 235533.16 - Page 1

SECTION 235533.16 - GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes gas-fired unit heaters.


A. Product Data: For each type of gas-fired unit heater.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For gas-fired unit heaters. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

1. Prepare details of fabrication and assembly of gas-fired unit heaters, as well as procedures and diagrams.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.



A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members to which equipment will be attached. 2. Items penetrating roof and the following:

a. Vent and gas piping rough-ins and connections.


C. Sample warranty.




Hope House



A. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace heat exchanger of gas-fired unit heater that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Lennox Industries, Inc.; Lennox International. 2. Modine Manufacturing Company. 3. REZNOR; Thomas & Betts Corporation, a member of ABB Group. 4. Sterling HVAC Products; a Mestek company. 5. Trane.



B. Capacities and Characteristics: Refer to schedule on Drawings.

2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired, and complying with ANSI Z83.8/CSA 2.6.

B. Gas Type: Design burner for natural gas having characteristics same as those of gas available at Project site.

C. Type of Venting: Indoor, separated combustion, power vented.








Hope House


D. Housing: Steel, with integral draft hood and inserts for suspension mounting rods.

1. External Casings and Cabinets: Baked enamel over corrosion-resistant-treated surface.

2. Discharge Louvers: Independently adjustable, horizontal blades.

E. Accessories:

1. Four-point suspension kit. 2. Power Venter: Centrifugal aluminized-steel fan, with stainless-steel shaft; 120-

V ac motor. 3. Concentric, Terminal Vent Assembly: Combined combustion-air inlet and power-

vent outlet with wall or roof caps. Include adapter assembly for connection to inlet and outlet pipes, and flashing for wall or roof penetration.

F. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized or stainless steel.

G. Burner Material: Aluminized steel with stainless-steel inserts.

H. Propeller Unit Fan:

1. Formed-steel or Aluminum propeller blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron hub, dynamically balanced, and resiliently mounted.

2. Fan-Blade Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications, removable for maintenance.

I. Centrifugal Unit Fan:

1. Steel, centrifugal fan dynamically balanced and resiliently mounted. 2. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly:

a. Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:

1) Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 2) Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-

aligning ball bearings. 3) Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.

J. Motors:

1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2. Enclosure Materials: Rolled steel. 3. Efficiency: Premium efficient. 4. Service Factor: 1.15.


Hope House


K. Controls: Regulated redundant gas valve containing pilot solenoid valve, electric gas valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff all in one body.

1. Gas Control Valve: Single stage. 2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor. 3. Fan Thermal Switch: Operates fan on heat-exchanger temperature. 4. Vent Flow Verification: Flame rollout switch or differential pressure switch to

verify open vent. 5. Control transformer. 6. High Limit: Thermal switch or fuse to stop burner. 7. Wall-Mounted Thermostat:

a. Single stage. b. Fan on-off-automatic switch. c. 24-V ac. d. 50 to 90 deg F operating range.

L. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install and connect gas-fired unit heaters and associated gas and vent features and systems according to NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING

A. Suspended Units: Suspend from substrate using threaded rods, spring hangers, and building attachments. Secure rods to unit hanger attachments. Adjust hangers so unit is level and plumb.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to gas-fired unit heater, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Gas Piping: Comply with Section 221133 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping. Connect gas piping to gas train inlet; provide union with enough clearance for burner removal and service.


Hope House


D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

2. Verify bearing lubrication. 3. Verify proper motor rotation. 4. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

a. Test procedures used. b. Test results that comply with requirements. c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action

taken to achieve compliance with requirements.

C. Gas-fired unit heater will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

B. Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and efficiency.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gas-fired unit heaters.



Hope House

AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 236313 - Page 1

SECTION 236313 - AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes packaged, air-cooled refrigerant condensers for outdoor installation.



B. Shop Drawings: For air-cooled refrigerant condensers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.






B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Lenox Industries, Inc.; Lennox International 2. Trane. 3. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.




Hope House



A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; consisting of casing, condenser coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls.

B. Refrigerant: R-410A.

C. SEER: 16 SEER

D. Condenser Coil: Factory tested at 425 psig.

1. Tube: 3/8-inch-diameter seamless copper. 2. Coil Fin: Aluminum. 3. Coating: Powder-baked enamel. 4. Circuit: To match compressors.

E. Condenser Fans and Drives: Propeller fans with aluminum fan blades, for vertical air discharge; directly driven with permanently lubricated ball-bearing motors with integral current- and thermal-overload protection.

1. Weather-proof motors with rain shield and shaft slinger. 2. Extend grease lines to outside of casing.

F. Operating and Safety Controls: Include condenser fan motor thermal and overload cutouts; 115-V control transformer, if required; magnetic contactors for condenser fan motors and a nonfused factory-mounted and -wired disconnect switch for single external electrical power connection.

1. Fan Cycling Control: Head pressure switches or ambient thermostats.

G. Casings: G60 Galvanized steel treated and finished with manufacturer's weather resistant powdered paint coating, designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components and controls, and with the following:

1. Removable panels for access to controls, condenser fans, motors, and drives. 2. Plated-steel fan guards. 3. Lifting eyes.

2.3 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. Refer to schedule on drawings.


Hope House


2.4 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 2. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven

load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 3. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit.


A. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to ARI 270.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

B. Equipment Mounting:

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."

C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not factory mounted.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

B. Refrigerant Piping: Connect piping to unit with pressure relief, service valve, filter-dryer, and moisture indicator on each refrigerant-circuit liquid line. Refrigerant piping and specialties are specified in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping."




1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection.


Hope House


2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Complete manufacturer's starting checklist.


5. Verify proper airflow over coils.

C. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure.

D. Air-cooled refrigerant condensers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.




October 10, 2017

Hope House

ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS 237416 - Page 1

SECTION 237416 - ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of

this section.




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Extent of rooftop heating and cooling unit work required by this section is indicated

on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this

Section:

1. Division 07 sections for roof-mounted equipment supports and flashing and

counter-flashing for roof penetrations.

2. Other Division 23 sections for piping and specialties which are required

external to rooftop units for installation.

3. Division 23 sections for field-installed automatic temperature controls

required in conjunction with rooftop units.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit shop drawings detailing the mounting, securing and flashing of the roof

curb to the roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane

system.



1. Gas-fired furnace section construction shall be in accordance with AGA

safety standards. Furnace section shall bear the AGA label.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


2. Testing and rating of rooftop units of 135,000 BTU/HR capacity or over

shall be in accordance with ARI 360 "Standard for Commercial and

Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment."

3. Testing and rating of rooftop units under 135,000 BTU/HR capacity shall be

in accordance with ARI 210 "Standard for Unitary Air-Conditioning

Equipment", and provide Certified Rating Seal. Sound testing and rating of

units shall be in accordance with ARI 270 "Standard for Sound Rating of

Outdoor Unitary Equipment". Units shall bear Certified Rating Seal.

4. Refrigerating system construction of rooftop units shall be in accordance

with ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."

5. Energy Compliance: Provide compressor units with not less than minimum

COP/Efficiency levels as prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 "Energy

Conservation in New Building Design" or as prescribed in state or local

energy code, whichever is more stringent.

6. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL):

Rooftop units shall be listed and labeled by a NRTL. The term "NRTL"

shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

7. Rooftop units shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance

with UL requirements.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:


1.6 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING

A. Coordinate installation of roof mounting curb with roof structure.

B. Coordinate installation on support structure (by others).

C. Coordinate roof opening locations and for mechanical and electrical connections.

1.7 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts for each

rooftop heating and cooling unit:

1. One set of matched fan belts for each belt-driven fan.

2. One set filters for each unit.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOFTOP UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide rooftop units of

one of the following:

1. Daikin

2. Trane.

3. Johnson.

B. General Description: Rooftop units shall be factory-assembled and tested,

designed for roof or slab installation, and consisting of compressors, condensers,

evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans, refrigeration filters and dampers.

Capacities and electrical characteristics are scheduled on the Drawings.

C. Casing:

1. All cabinet walls, access doors, and roof shall be fabricated of double wall,

impact resistant, rigid polyurethane foam panels.

2. Unit insulation shall have a minimum thermal resistance R-value of 13.

Foam insulation shall have a minimum density of 2 pounds/cubic foot and

shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D-1929 for a minimum flash

ignition temperature of 610°F.

3. Unit construction shall be double wall with G90 galvanized steel on both

sides and a thermal break with no metal path from inside to outside the

cabinet. Double wall construction with a thermal break prevents moisture

accumulation on the insulation, provides a cleanable interior, prevents heat

transfer through the panel, and prevents exterior condensation on the

panel.

D. Supply Fans:

1. Unit shall include direct drive, unhoused, and backward curbed, plenum

supply fans.

2. Blowers and motors shall be dynamically balanced and mounted on rubber

isolators.

3. Motors shall be standard (premium) efficiency ODP with ball bearings rated

for 200,000 hours service with external lubrication points.

a. Where indicated on drawings, a variable frequency drive shall be

factory wired and mounted in the unit. Fan motors shall be

premium efficiency.

E. Exhaust Fans:

1. Fans and motors shall be dynamically balanced.

2. Motors shall be standard premium efficiency ODP with ball bearings rated

for 200,000 hours of service with external lubrication points.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


3. Access to exhaust fans shall be through double wall, hinged access doors

with quarter turn handles.

F. Cooling Coils

1. Evaporator Coils

a. Coils shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant and

constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically

bonded to the tubes and galvanized steel end casings. Fin design

shall be sine wave rippled.

b. Coils shall be helium leak tested.

c. Coils shall be furnished with a factory installed thermostatic

expansion valves.

G. Refrigeration System

1. Unit shall be factory charged with R-410A refrigerant.

2. Compressors shall be scroll type with thermal overload protection,

independently circuited, and carry a 5 year non-prorated warranty.

3. Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated service compartment which

can be accessed without affecting unit operation. Lockable hinged

compressor access doors shall be fabricated of double wall, rigid

polyurethane foam insulated panels to prevent the transmission of noise

outside the cabinet.

4. Compressors shall be isolated from the base pan with the compressor

manufacturer’s recommended rubber vibration isolators, to reduce any

transmission of noise from the compressors into the building area.

5. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion

valve type refrigerant flow control.

6. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with automatic reset low

pressure and manual reset high pressure refrigerant safety controls,

Schrader type service fittings on both the high pressure and low pressure

sides, and factory installed liquid line filter driers.

a. Unit shall include a variable capacity scroll compressor on the

lead (all) refrigeration circuit(s) which shall be capable of

modulation from 10-100% of its capacity.

b. Lead refrigeration circuit(s) shall be provided with hot gas reheat

coil, modulating valves, electronic controller, supply air temperature

sensor and a dehumidification control signal terminal which allow

the unit to have a dehumidification mode of operation, which

includes supply air temperature control to prevent supply air

temperature swings and overcooling of the space.

c. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with a liquid line sight

glass.

H. Condensers

1. Air-Cooled Condenser


October 10, 2017

Hope House


a. Condenser fans shall be vertical discharge, axial flow, direct drive

fans.

b. Coils shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant and

constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically

bonded to the tubes and aluminum end casings. Fin design shall be

sine wave rippled.

c. Coils shall be designed for a minimum of 10 F of refrigerant sub-

cooling.

d. Coils shall be helium leak tested.

I. Gas Heating

1. Unit shall include a natural gas furnace with a control valve capable of

5:1 modulating operation and or stage heating as indicated in the

schedules.

2. Stainless steel heat exchanger furnace shall carry a 25 year non-

prorated warranty.

3. Gas furnace shall consist of stainless steel heat exchangers with

multiple concavities, an induced draft blower and an electronic

pressure switch to lockout the gas valve until the combustion chamber

is purged and combustion airflow is established.

4. Furnace shall include a gas ignition system consisting of an electronic

igniter to a pilot system, which will be continuous when the heater is

operating, but will shut off the pilot when heating is not required.

5. Unit shall include a single gas connection and have gas supply piping

entrances in the unit base for through-the-curb gas piping and in the

outside cabinet wall for across the roof gas piping.

6. The factory installed DDC unit control system shall control the gas heat

module. Field installed heating modules shall require a field ETL

certification. The manufacturer’s rooftop unit ETL certification shall cover

the complete unit including the gas heating module.

J. Energy Recovery (RTU-3 Only)

1. The rooftop unit shall be provided with an AHRI certified rotary wheel air-

to-air heat exchanger in a cassette frame complete with seals, drive motor

and drive belt. The energy recovery wheel shall be an integral part of the

rooftop unit with unitary construction and does not require field assembly.

Bolt-on energy recovery units that require field assembly and section to

section gasketing and sealing are not acceptable.

2. The wheel capacity, air pressure drop and effectiveness shall be AHRI

certified per AHRI Standard 1060. Thermal performance shall be certified

by the manufacturer in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84, Method of

Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers and AHRI Standard 1060, Rating Air-

to-Air Heat Exchangers For Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


3. The rooftop unit shall be designed with a track so the entire energy

recovery wheel cassette can slide out from the rooftop unit to facilitate

cleaning.

4. The unit shall have 2” Merv 7 filters for the outdoor air before the wheel to

help keep the wheel clean and reduce maintenance. Filter access shall be

by a hinged access door with ¼ turn latches.

5. The matrix design shall have channels to reduce cross contamination

between the outdoor air and the exhaust air. The layers shall be

effectively captured in aluminum and stainless steel segment frames that

provide a rigid and self-supporting matrix. All diameter and perimeter seals

shall be provided as part of the cassette assembly and shall be factory set.

Drive belt(s) of stretch urethane shall be provided for wheel rim drive

without the need for external tensioners or adjustment.

6. The total energy recovery wheel shall be coated with silica gel desiccant

permanently bonded without the use of binders or adhesives, which may

degrade desiccant performance. The substrate shall be lightweight

polymer and shall not degrade nor require additional coatings for

application in marine or coastal environments. Coated segments shall be

washable with detergent or alkaline coil cleaner and water. Desiccant shall

not dissolve nor deliquesce in the presence of water or high humidity.

7. Wheels shall be provided with removable energy transfer matrix. Wheel

frame construction shall be a welded hub, spoke and rim assembly of

stainless, plated and/or coated steel and shall be self-supporting without

matrix segments in place. Segments shall be removable without the use of

tools to facilitate maintenance and cleaning.

8. Wheel bearings shall be selected to provide an L-10 life in excess of

400,000 hours. Rim shall be continuous rolled stainless steel. Wheels

shall be connected to the shaft by means of taper lock hubs.

9. The exhaust air fan shall be a direct drive SWSI plenum fan. The exhaust

fan shall be sized for the airflow requirements per the construction

schedule. The unit controller shall control the exhaust fan to maintain

building pressure. A VFD shall be provided for the exhaust fan motor or

the exhaust fan motor shall be an ECM motor.The rooftop unit shall have

single point electrical power connection and shall be ETL listed.

10. The control of the energy recovery wheel shall be an integral part of the

rooftop unit’s DDC controller. The DDC controller shall have visibility of

the outdoor air temperature, leaving wheel temperature, return air

temperature, and exhaust air temperature. These temperatures shall be

displayed at the rooftop units DDC controller LCD display. All of these

temperatures shall be made available through the BACnet interface.

11. The rooftop unit with the energy recovery wheel shall incorporate the

economizer operation. The energy recovery wheel shall have a bypass


October 10, 2017

Hope House


damper. When the unit is in the economizer mode of operation the energy

recovery wheel shall stop and the bypass dampers shall be opened. The

outdoor air shall be drawn through the bypass dampers to reduce the

pressure drop of the outdoor airstream.

12. The rooftop unit DDC controller shall provide frost control for the energy

recovery wheel. When a frost condition is encountered the unit controller

shall stop the wheel. When in the frost control mode the wheel shall be

jogged periodically and not be allowed to stay in the stationary position.

K. Variable Air volume control

1. RTU-2: The unit controller shall proportionally control the Electronically

Commutated Motors (ECM) on the supply and exhaust fans. The supply

fan shall be controlled to maintain an adjustable duct pressure setpoint. A

duct static pressure sensor shall be factory mounted in the control panel.

The field shall furnish and install the pneumatic tubing for the duct static

pressure sensor and the building pressure sensor. The field shall furnish

and install the outdoor air pressure sensor.

2. RTU-3: The unit controller shall proportional control the ECM motors on

the supply fan based on space temperature. The unit controller shall

increase/decrease the speed of the supply fan in order to maintain the

space temperature within its setpoint and deadband. The unit controller

shall provide discharge air temperature control with the compressor

modulation.

L. Controls

1. Provide a complete integrated microprocessor based Direct Digital Control

(DDC) system to control all unit functions including temperature control,

scheduling, monitoring, unit safety protection, including compressor

minimum run and minimum off times, and diagnostics. This system shall

consist of all required temperature sensors, pressure sensors, controller

and keypad/display operator interface. All MCBs and sensors shall be

factory mounted, wired and tested.

2. The stand-alone DDC controllers shall not be dependent on

communications with any on-site or remote PC or master control panel for

proper unit operation. The microprocessor shall maintain existing set

points and operate stand alone if the unit loses either direct connect or

network communications. The microprocessor memory shall be protected

from voltage fluctuations as well as any extended power failures. All

factory and user set schedules and control points shall be maintained in


October 10, 2017

Hope House


nonvolatile memory. No settings shall be lost, even during extended power

shutdowns.

3. The DDC control system shall permit starting and stopping of the unit

locally or remotely. The control system shall be capable of providing a

remote alarm indication. The unit control system shall provide for outside

air damper actuation, emergency shutdown, remote heat enable/disable,

remote cool enable/disable, heat indication, cool indication, and fan

operation.

4. All digital inputs and outputs shall be protected against damage from

transients or incorrect voltages. All field wiring shall be terminated at a

separate, clearly marked terminal strip.

5. The DDC controller shall have a built-in time schedule. The schedule shall

be programmable from the unit keypad interface. The schedule shall be

maintained in nonvolatile memory to insure that it is not lost during a power

failure. There shall be one start/stop per day and a separate holiday

schedule. The controller shall accept up to sixteen holidays each with up to

a 5-day duration. Each unit shall also have the ability to accept a time

schedule via BAS network communications.

6. The keypad interface shall allow convenient navigation and access to all

control functions. The unit keypad/display character format shall be 4 lines

x 20 characters. All control settings shall be password protected against

unauthorized changes. For ease of service, the display format shall be

English language readout. Coded formats with look-up tables will not be

accepted. The user interaction with the display shall provide the following

information as a minimum:

a. Return air temperature.

b. Discharge air temperature.

c. Outdoor air temperature.

d. Space air temperature.

e. Outdoor enthalpy, high/low.

f. Compressor suction temperature and pressure

g. Compressor head pressure and temperature

h. Expansion valve position

i. Condenser fan speed

j. Inverter compressor speed

k. Dirty filter indication.

l. Airflow verification.

m. Cooling status.

n. Control temperature (Changeover).

o. VAV box output status.

p. Cooling status/capacity.

q. Unit status.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


r. All time schedules.

s. Active alarms with time and date.

t. Previous alarms with time and date.

u. Optimal start

v. Supply fan and exhaust fan speed.

w. System operating hours.

(1) Fan

(2) Exhaust fan

(3) Cooling

(4) Inndividual compressor

(5) Heating

(6) Economizer

(7) Tenant override

7. The user interaction with the keypad shall provide the following:

a. Controls mode

(1) Off manual

(2) Auto

(3) Heat/Cool

(4) Cool only

(5) Heat only

(6) Fan only

b. Occupancy mode

(1) Auto

(2) Occupied

(3) Unoccupied

(4) Tenant override

c. Unit operation changeover control

(1) Return air temperature

(2) Space temperature

(3) Network signal

d. Cooling and heating change-over temperature with deadband

e. Cooling discharge air temperature (DAT)

f. Supply reset options

(1) Return air temperature

(2) Outdoor air temperature

(3) Space temperature

(4) Airflow (VAV)

(5) Network signal

(6) External (0-10 vdc)

(7) External (0-20 mA)

g. Temperature alarm limits

(1) High supply air temperature


October 10, 2017

Hope House


(2) Low supply air temperature

(3) High return air temperature

h. Lockout control for compressors.

i. Compressor interstage timers

j. Night setback and setup space temperature.

k. Building static pressure.

l. Economizer changeover

(1) Enthalpy

(2) Drybulb temperature

m. Currently time and date

n. Tenant override time

o. Occupied/unoccupied time schedule

p. One event schedule

q. Holiday dates and duration

r. Adjustable set points

s. Service mode

(1) Timers normal (all time delays normal)

(2) Timers fast (all time delays 20 sec)

8. If the unit is to be programmed with a night setback or setup function, an

optional space sensor shall be provided. Space sensors shall be available

to support field selectable features. Sensor options shall include:

a. Zone sensor with tenant override switch

b. Zone sensor with tenant override switch plus heating and cooling

set point adjustment. (Space Comfort Control systems only)

9. To increase the efficiency of the cooling system the DDC controller shall

include a discharge air temperature reset program for part load operating

conditions. The discharge air temperature shall be controlled between a

minimum and a maximum discharge air temperature (DAT) based on one

of the following inputs:

a. Airflow

b. Outside air temperature

c. Space temperature

d. Return air temperature

e. External signal of 1-5 vdc

f. External signal of 0-20 mA

g. Network signal

M. Accessories:

1. Economizer control: Return and outside air dampers, outside air filter, fully modulating electric control system with enthalpy control, and adjustable mixed-air thermostat. Return air damper to be disconnected and closed at completion of construction. System shall have 100 percent outside air


October 10, 2017

Hope House


capability. Provide automatic changeover through adjustable enthalpy control device.

2. Roof curb (RTU-1,2,4): A prefabricated heavy gauge galvanized steel, mounting curb shall be provided for field assembly on the roof decking prior to unit shipment. The roof curb shall be a full perimeter type with complete perimeter support of the air handling section and condensing section. The curb shall be a minimum of 14” high and include the nominal 2”x4” wood nailing strip. Gasket shall be provided for field mounting between the unit base and roof curb.

3. Roof curb (RTU-5): A prefabricated heavy gauge galvanized steel, mounting curb with an insulated return / supply air plenum for horizontal ducted installations. Factory installed wood nailer and 1-1/2”x1/4” neoprene gasket (field installed). “Thybar” model “TC-3” horizontal roof curb or approved equal.

4. Supply and return duct mounted smoke detectors.

5. Filters section:

a. Filter Bank No. 1: 2-inch thick pleated throwaway filters, MERV 8 in filter rack, with maximum face velocity of 300 fpm.

6. Electrical: Units shall have a 115 AC convenience outlet, separately fused, for unit service. Unit power connection shall be either through unit cabinet or within roof curb perimeter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which rooftop units are to be installed. Do

not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in

manner acceptable to Installer.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install rooftop units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

B. Support: Install and secure roof curb to roof structure, in accordance with National Roofing Contractor's Association (NRCA) installation recommendations and shop drawings. Install and secure rooftop units on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing.

C. Electrical Drawings: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to electrical Installer.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to manufacturer and equipment installer.

D. Control: Furnish field-installed automatic temperature control requirements to control Installer.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to start-up rooftop units, in accordance with manufacturer's written start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Operating and Maintenance Training:

1. Provide services of manufacturer's service representative to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of rooftop units (minimum 4 hours). Training shall include start-up and shut-down, servicing and preventative maintenance schedule and procedures, and troubleshooting procedures plus procedures for obtaining repair parts and technical assistance. Review operating and maintenance data contained in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division One.



Hope House

ROOFTOP MAKE-UP AIR UNITS 237416 - 1

SECTION 237416 – ROOFTOP MAKE-UP AIR UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions of Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2. SUMMARY

A. This section includes Packaged Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Units with integral heating for rooftop installation.

B. Integral heat source shall be Indirect Gas-Fired furnace

C. Airflow arrangement shall be Outdoor Air only.

D. Within this document, these units may be referred to as Energy Recovery Unit (ERU) for brevity. Each unit shall be constructed in a horizontal configuration and shall incorporate additional product requirements as listed in Section 2 of this specification.

E. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 General Requirements 2. Division 23 Heating, Ventilating, and Cooling (HVAC) 3. Division 26 Electrical

1.3. SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type or model of Packaged Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Unit with Integral heating and cooling, include the following:

1. Complete fan performance curves for both Supply Air and Exhaust Air, with system operating conditions indicated, as tested in an AMCA Certified Chamber.

2. Sound performance data for both Supply Air and Exhaust Air, as tested in an AMCA Certified chamber.

3. Energy wheel performance data for both summer and winter operation. 4. AHRI Certified coil performance ratings with system operating conditions

indicated. Ratings shall be in accordance with Standard 410. 5. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics and motor and fan accessories. 6. Combined efficiency data per ARI Guideline V-2003 for each model. Data shall

include RER, COP, Unitary Net Cooling, Unitary EER and CEF. 7. Material types and gauges of all component pieces and assemblies. 8. Dimensioned drawings for each type of installation, showing isometric and plan

views, to include location of attached ductwork and service clearance requirements.


Hope House


9. Estimated gross weight of each installed unit. 10. Installation, Operating and Maintenance manual (IOM) for each model. 11. Microprocessor Controller specifications to include available options and

operating protocols. Include complete data on all factory-supplied input devices.

1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain Packaged Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Unit with all appurtenant components or accessories from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings must indicate size, profiles and dimensional requirements of Energy Recovery Units and are to be based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements".

C. Certifications

1. Blowers shall be AMCA Certified for air flow. 2. Entire unit shall be ETL Certified per U.L. 1995 and bear an ETL sticker. 3. Energy Wheel shall be AHRI Certified, per Standard 1060. 4. Coils shall be Recognized Components for ANSI/UL 1995, CAN / CSA C22.2 No

236.05. DX and water coils shall be AHRI Certified per standard 410-2001.

D. Indirect gas-fired furnace shall be ETL Certified as a component of the ERU. Indirect gas-fired furnace shall be an ETL Recognized Component of the ERU per ANSI Z83.8.

1.5. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of all building penetrations required for installation of each Energy Recovery Unit and associated plumbing and electrical systems.

B. Coordinate location of water system fittings to ensure correct positioning for connection to the water coil and condensate drain pipe.

C. Coordinate sequencing of construction of associated plumbing, HVAC, electrical supply, roofing contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specifications contained within this document, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to:

1. Greenheck Fan Corporation 2. Johnson 3. Daiken


Hope House


2.2. MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Packaged Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Units shall be fully assembled at the factory and consist of an insulated metal cabinet, with engineered curb kit, motorized low leakage intake damper, filter assemblies for both intake and exhaust air, energy wheel, airside coil, engineered P trap assembly with P trap, supply air blower assembly, indirect gas-fired furnace, exhaust air blower assembly electrical control unit with all specified components and internal accessories factory installed and tested and prepared for single-point high voltage connection. Entire unit with the exception of field-installed components shall be assembled and test operated at the factory.

2.3. CABINET

A. Materials: Formed, insulated double wall construction, fabricated to permit access to internal components for maintenance.

1. Outside casing: 18 gauge, galvanized (G90) steel meeting ASTM A653 for components that do not receive a painted finish. Pre-painted components as supplied by the factory shall have polyester urethane paint on 18 gauge G60 galvanized steel.

2. Internal assemblies: prepainted 20 gauge galvannealed steel except for motor supports which shall be 14 gauge galvanized (G90) steel.

B. Cabinet Insulation: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B and erosion requirements of UL 181.

1. Materials: Fiberglass insulation. If insulation other than fiberglass is used, it must also meet the Fire Hazard Classification shown below.

a. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm) b. Fire Hazard Classification: Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke

developed of 50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 411. c. Location and application: Full coverage of entire cabinet exterior to

include walls and roof of unit. Insulation shall be of semi-rigid type and installed between inner and outer shells of all cabinet exterior components.

2. Materials: Rigid urethane foam

a. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm) b. Meets UL94HF-1 flame requirements. c. Location and application: Doors and the floor of the unit.

C. Access panels / doors: Unit shall be equipped with insulated, hinged doors or removable access panels to provide easy access to all major components. Doors and access panels shall be fabricated of 18 gauge galvanized G90 steel.

D. Condensate drain pan: Pan shall be formed of welded austenitic stainless steel sheet material and provided with a welded drain connection at the front for connection to a P trap. Drain pan shall be sloped in two directions to provide positive draining.


Hope House


E. P trap: An engineered P trap (condensate drain) assembly shall be provided for each unit, to include cleanout ports, cleanout tool, vacuum break device and see-through reservoir to permit visual verification of water levels.

F. Energy wheel: Energy wheel shall be of total enthalpy, rotary air-to-air type and shall be an element of a removable energy wheel cassette. The cassette shall consist of a galvanized steel framework (designed to produce laminar air flow through the wheel), an energy wheel as specified and a motor and drive assembly. The cassette shall incorporate a pre-tensioned urethane drive belt with a five year warranty. The wheel media shall be a polymer film matrix in a stainless steel framework and be comprised of individual segments that are removable for servicing. Non-segmented energy wheels are not acceptable. The polymer film material shall be coated with silica gel desiccant and shall be designed and constructed to permit cleaning and servicing. The energy wheel is to have a five year warranty. Performance criteria are to be as specified in AHRI Standard 1060, complying with the Combined Efficiency data in the submittal.

G. Compressed refrigerant coils shall be AHRI Certified and shall be (silver) soldered or brazed into the compressed refrigerant system. Coil shall be constructed of copper tubing, permanently bonded to aluminum fins and enclosed in a galvanized steel frame. If two compressors are used as components of a packaged DX system in the ERU, then the evaporator coil shall be of "interlaced" configuration, permitting independent operation of either compressor without conflict with the other compressor.

H. Supply Air and Exhaust Air blower assemblies: Blower assemblies consist of an electric motor and a belt driven blower. Assembly shall be mounted on heavy gauge galvanized rails and further mounted on 1.125 inch thick neoprene vibration isolators.

I. Control panel / connections: Energy Recovery Unit shall have an electrical control center where all high and low voltage connections are made. Control center shall be constructed to permit single-point high voltage power supply connections. Optional electric post heater shall have a separate electrical control center and separate high voltage power circuit as shown on the plans. Optional electric post heater shall have a separate electrical control center and separate high voltage power circuit as shown on the plans.

J. Indirect gas furnace shall be ETL Certified as a component of the Energy Recovery Air Unit. Shall have an integral exhaust gas blower shall be ETL Certified for installation downstream of a cooling coil. Shall have fault sensors to provide fault conditions to optional digital controller or building controls. Shall have 4-pass tubular heat exchangers, constructed of type 409 stainless steel. Heat exchanger tubes shall be installed on the vest plate by means of swaged assembly, welded connections are not acceptable. Heat exchanger tubes shall be supported by a minimum of two fabricated assemblies that support the tubes and also permit expansion and contraction of the tubes.

K. Furnace control shall be High Turndown 16:1 Modulating. Shall have solid state controls permitting stand-alone operation or control by building controllers.

L. Shall be encased in a weather-tight metal housing with intake air vents. Large, metal lift-off or hinged door shall provide easy access to the enclosed vest plate, control circuitry, gas train, burner assembly and exhaust blower.


Hope House


M. Motorized dampers / Intake Air, Motorized dampers of low leakage type shall be factory installed.

N. Curb Assembly: A curb assembly made of 14 gauge galvanized steel shall be provided by the factory for assembly and installation as part of this division. The curb assembly shall provide perimeter support of the entire energy recovery unit and shall have duct adapters for both intake air and return air. Curb assembly shall enclose the underside of the unit and shall be sized to fit into a recess in the bottom of the energy recovery unit. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with roofing contractor to ensure curb unit is properly flashed to provide protection against weather/moisture penetration. Contractor shall provide and install appropriate insulation for the curb assembly.

2.4. BLOWER SECTION

A. Blower section construction, Supply Air and Exhaust Air: Belt drive motor and blower shall be assembled onto a 14 gauge galvanized steel platform and must have neoprene vibration isolation devices.

B. Blower assemblies: Shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and horsepower.

C. Centrifugal blower housing: Formed and reinforced steel panels to make curved scroll housing with shaped cutoff.

D. Forward curved blower (fan) wheels: Galvanized or aluminum construction with inlet flange and shallow blades curved forward in direction of airflow. Mechanically attached to shaft with set screws.

E. Blower section motor source quality control: Blower performance shall be factory tested for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed and efficiency. Ratings are to be established in accordance with AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating".

2.5. MOTORS

A. General: Blower motors greater than 3/4 horsepower shall be "NEMA Premium" unless otherwise indicated. Compliance with EPAct minimum energy-efficiency standards for single speed ODP and TE enclosures is not acceptable. Motors shall be heavy-duty, permanently lubricated type to match the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower and pulleys shall be fully machined cast-type, keyed and fully secured to the fan wheel and motor shafts. Electric motors of ten horsepower or less shall be supplied with an adjustable drive pulley. Comply with requirements in Division 23 05 13, matched with fan load.

B. Motors shall be 60 cycle, 3 phase 208 volts.

2.6. UNIT CONTROLS


Hope House


A. The ERU shall be constructed so that it can function as a stand-alone heating controlled by factory-supplied controllers, discharge controller reset from space sensor (Third Floor corridor) and sensors.

B. Operating protocol: Manufacturer supplied unitary controls. The mechanical contractor shall be responsible for installation.

C. Sensors

1. Dirty filter sensor 2. Rotation Sensor

2.7. FILTER SECTION

A. Energy Recovery Unit shall have permanent metal filters located in the outdoor air intake and shall be accessible from the exterior of the unit. MERV 8 pleated filters shall be provided in the intake air stream and MERV 8 filters in the exhaust air stream.

B. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 232300 “Refrigerant Piping.”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. EXAMINATION

A. Prior to start of installation, examine area and conditions to verify correct location for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting unit performance. See unit IOM.

B. Examine roughing-in of plumbing, electrical and HVAC services to verify actual location and compliance with unit requirements. See unit IOM.

C. Proceed with installation only after all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2. INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be accomplished in accordance with these written specifications, project drawings, manufacturer's installation instructions as documented in manufacturer's IOM, Best Practices and all applicable building codes.

3.3. CONNECTIONS

A. In all cases, industry Best Practices shall be incorporated. Connections are to be made subject to the installation requirements shown above.

B. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 and 23. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings and specialties.


Hope House


C. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in Division 23 of this document.

D. Electrical installation requirements are specified in Division 26 of this document.

3.4. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect field assembled components and equipment installation, to include electrical and piping connections. Report results to A / E in writing. Inspection must include a complete startup checklist to include (as a minimum) the following: Completed Start-Up Checklists as found in manufacturer's IOM.

3.5. START-UP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to perform startup service. Clean entire unit, comb coil fins as necessary, install clean filters. Verify water source for compliance with manufacturer's requirements for flow and temperature. Measure and record electrical values for voltage and amperage. Refer to Division 23 "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing" and comply with provisions therein.

3.6. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain the entire energy recovery unit. Refer to Division 01 Section Closeout Procedures and Demonstration and Training.



Hope House

PACKAGED, INDIRECT-FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING-ONLY MAKE-UP AIR UNITS

237423 - Page 1

SECTION 237423.16 - PACKAGED, INDIRECT-FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING-ONLY MAKEUP-AIR UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes indirect-fired makeup-air units.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.


A. Product Data: For each type and configuration of outdoor, indirect-fired makeup-air unit.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type and configuration of outdoor, indirect-fired heating and ventilating unit.

1. Signed, sealed, and prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

4. Detail fabrication and assembly of gas-fired heating and ventilating units, as well as procedures and diagrams.

5. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases.

6. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.


http://contact.arcomnet.com/ContentContact.aspx?sect=23742316&ver=12/01/16&format=FL&sid=13426

http://contact.arcomnet.com/ContentContact.aspx?sect=23742316&ver=12/01/16&format=FL&sid=13426


Hope House


237423 - Page 2


A. Startup service reports.

B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For outdoor, indirect-fired makeup-air units, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For indirect-fired makeup-air units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: One set(s) for each unit. 2. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each unit.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of indirect-fired heating and ventilating units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion.


Hope House


237423 - Page 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Thermotek

B. Greenheck

C. Reznor

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Factory-assembled, prewired, self-contained unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, controls, filters and indirect-fired gas burner to be installed exterior to the building.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 UNIT CASINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings:

1. Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint. 2. Casing Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets, factory sealed with water-

resistant sealant. 3. Factory Finish for steel Casings: Apply manufacturer's standard primer

immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 4. Factory Finish for galvanized steel Casings: Immediately after cleaning and

pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on enamel finish, consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

5. Air-Handling-Unit Mounting Frame: Formed galvanized-steel channel or structural channel supports, designed for low deflection, welded with integral lifting lugs.

a. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate mounting base and attachment to air-handling-unit sections, accessories, and components with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" when air-handling-unit frame is anchored to building structure.

6. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

B. Configuration: Horizontal unit with bottom discharge for roof mounting installation.

C. Cabinet: Galvanized steel panels, formed to ensure rigidity and supported by galvanized-steel channels or structural channel supports with lifting lugs. Duct flanges


Hope House


237423 - Page 4

at inlet and outlet. Pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs.

D. Inner Casing: 1. Double-wall casing with inner wall of perforated steel:

a. Blower section. b. Filter section. c. Mixing box. d. Inlet plenum. e. Discharge plenum. f. Access Panels: for burner and fan motor assemblies on both sides of unit.

2. Internal Insulation: Fibrous-glass duct lining, neoprene coated, comply with ASTM C 1071, Type II, applied on complete unit.

a. Thickness: 1” b. Insulation Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. c. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive, mechanical,

or welding attachment to casing without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing air leakage.

E. Discharge Section:

1. Galvanized steel assembly with motorized parallel-blade dampers with nylon bushings.

2. Trapezoidal cowls with horizontal louvers. 3. Plenum with two sides louvered. 4. Down-discharge plenum insulated 1” fibrous glass.

F. Casing Insulation and Adhesive:

1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, type 1: 2. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical

fasteners to the internal surface of section panels downstream from, and including, the heating-coil section.

a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive, mechanical,

or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet.

c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have airstream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric, depending on service-air velocity.

3. Location and Application: Encased between outside and inside casing.

G. Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors:


Hope House


237423 - Page 5

1. Panel and Door Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, single- or double-wall and insulated panels of same materials and thicknesses as casing.

2. Inspection and Access Panels:

a. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames. c. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling

unit's internal components.

3. Access Doors:

a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge and two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to be opened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.

4. Locations and Applications:

a. Access Section: Panels. b. Coil Section: Inspection and access panels. c. Filter Section: Large enough to allow periodic removal and installation of

filters. d. Mixing Section: Doors.

5. Service Light: 100-W vaporproof fixture with switched junction box located inside adjacent to door.

a. Locations: Fans and burner

H. Condensate Drain Pans:

1. Fabricated with 1 percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from condensate-producing heat exchangers and from humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection.

a. Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with ASHRAE 62.1

b. Depth: A minimum of 3” deep.

2. Formed sections. 3. Single-wall, galvanized-steel sheet. 4. Double-wall, galvanized-steel sheet with space between walls filled with foam

insulation and moisture-tight seal. 5. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow.

Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.

a. Minimum Connection Size: NPS1


Hope House


237423 - Page 6

6. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Duplex, 115-V, ground-fault-interrupter outlet with 15-A overcurrent protection. Include transformer if required.

B. Filter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter pressure loss.

C. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire.

D. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing.

E. Freeze Stat.

F. Manufacturers discharge air controller.

2.5 OUTDOOR-AIR INTAKE HOOD

A. Type: Manufacturer's standard hood or louver.

B. Materials: Match cabinet.

C. Bird Screen: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Filter: Aluminum, 1” cleanable.

E. Configuration: Designed to inhibit wind-driven rain and snow from entering unit.

2.6 ROOF CURBS

A. Roof curbs with vibration isolators and wind or seismic restraints are specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

B. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factory-installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards.

1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or Type II. b. Thickness: 1” thick

2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb.

a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging


Hope House


237423 - Page 7

liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet.

c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity.

d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

C. Curb Height: 24” high.

D. Wind and Seismic Restraints: Metal brackets compatible with the curb and casing, painted to match unit, used to anchor unit to the curb, and designed for loads at Project site. Comply with requirements in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for wind-load requirements.

2.7 SUPPLY-AIR FAN

A. Fan Type: 10” forward curved, centrifugal blower. Permanently lubricated ball bearings.

B. Drive: V-belt drive with matching fan pulley and adjustable motor sheaves and belt assembly.

C. Fan-Shaft Lubrication Lines: Extended to a location outside the casing.

2.8 AIR FILTERS

A. Comply with NFPA 90A

B. Cleanable Filters: Cleanable metal mesh.

1. Thickness: 2” 3X MV EZ filters as provided by the manufacturer.

2.9 DAMPERS

A. Outdoor-Air and Return air Damper: Galvanized-steel, opposed-blade dampers with vinyl blade seals and stainless-steel jamb seals.

B. Damper Operator: Direct coupled, electronic with spring return or fully modulating as required by the control sequence.

2.10 INDIRECT-FIRED GAS BURNER

A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; and complying with ANSI Z21.47, "Gas-Fired Central Furnaces," and with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."

1. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA. 2. Burners: Stainless steel.


Hope House


237423 - Page 8

a. Gas Control Valve: Modulating b. Fuel: natural gas. c. Minimum Combustion Efficiency: 80 percent. d. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor.

B. Venting: Gravity vented.

C. Venting: Power vented, with integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve.

D. Combustion-Air Intake: Separate combustion-air intake and vent terminal assembly.

E. Heat Exchanger: stainless steel.

F. Heat-Exchanger Drain Pan: Stainless steel.

G. Safety Controls:

1. Vent Flow Verification: Differential pressure switch to verify open vent. 2. Control Transformer: 24-V ac. 3. High Limit: Thermal switch or fuse to stop burner. 4. Gas Train: Regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing pilot

solenoid valve, modulating temperature control valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff all in one body.

5. Purge-period timer shall automatically delay burner ignition and bypass low-limit control.

6. Gas Manifold: Safety switches and controls complying with ANSI standards. 7. Airflow Proving Switch: Differential pressure switch senses correct airflow before

energizing pilot. 8. Automatic-Reset, High-Limit Control Device: Stops burner and closes main gas

valve if high-limit temperature is exceeded. 9. Safety Lockout Switch: Locks out ignition sequence if burner fails to light after

three tries. Controls are reset manually by turning the unit off and on.

2.11 UNIT CONTROL PANEL

A. Factory-wired, fuse-protected control transformer, connection for power supply and field-wired unit to remote control panel.

B. Control Panel: Surface mounted remote panel, with engraved plastic cover and the following lights and switches:

1. On-off-auto fan switch. 2. Heat-vent-off switch. 3. Supply-fan operation indicating light. 4. Heating operation indicating light. 5. Thermostat. 6. Damper position potentiometer. 7. Dirty-filter indicating light operated by unit-mounted differential pressure switch. 8. Safety-lockout indicating light.


Hope House


237423 - Page 9

9. Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1.

2.12 CONTROLS

A. Control Devices:

1. Remote Thermostat / controller: Adjustable room thermostat with temperature readout. Controller / thermostat furnished by the equipment manufacturer and installed by the mechanical contractor.

B. exhaust fan(s) to which this heating and ventilating unit is associated for makeup air.

C. Fan Control: Timer starts and stops indirect-fired heating and ventilating unit and exhaust fan(s).

D. Outdoor-Air Damper Control, 100 Percent Outdoor-Air Units: Outdoor-air damper shall open when supply fan starts, and close when fan stops.

E. Mixed Outdoor- and Return-Air Damper Control: When fan is running, outdoor- and return-air dampers shall modulate to supply minimum outdoor air as follows:

1. Minimum 22% percent outdoor air. 2. Outdoor-air quantity adjusted by potentiometer on control panel. 3. Outdoor-air quantity to maintain minimum building static pressure.

F. Temperature Control: Operates gas valve to maintain supply-air temperature.

1. Operates gas valve to maintain discharge-air temperature with factory-mounted sensor in blower outlet.

2. Operates gas valve to maintain space temperature with wall-mounting, field-wired sensor with thermostat adjustment.

3. Burner Control: Two or four steps of control using one or two burner sections in series.

4. Burner Control: 20 to 100 percent modulation of the firing rate. 10 to 100 percent with dual burner units.

G. Interface with DDC System for HVAC: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the DDC system for HVAC to monitor, control, and display status and alarms of heating and ventilating unit.

1. Hardwired Points:

a. Room temperature. b. Discharge-air temperature. c. Burner operating.


Hope House


237423 - Page 10

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping, ducts, and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment installation.

C. Verify cleanliness of airflow path to include inner-casing surfaces, filters, coils, turning vanes, fan wheels, and other components.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting: 1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices

specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in

Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."

B. Unit Support: Install heating and ventilating unit level on structural curbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction.

C. Install gas-fired units according to NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."

D. Install controls and equipment shipped by manufacturer for field installation with indirect-fired heating and ventilating units.

E. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure. Install units on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories." Secure units to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts.

F. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction. Secure units to structural support with anchor bolts.

3.3 CONNECTIONS


1. Gas Piping: The installing contractor shall be responsible for final connections.

B. Drain: Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for traps and accessories on piping connections to condensate drain pans under


Hope House


237423 - Page 11

condensing heat exchangers. Where installing piping adjacent to heating and ventilating units, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Duct Connections: Connect supply and return ducts to indirect-fired heating and ventilating units with flexible duct connectors. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for flexible duct connectors.

D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. See Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.

D. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Preform startup service.

B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following:

1. Inspect for visible damage to burner combustion chamber. 2. Inspect casing insulation for integrity, moisture content, and adhesion. 3. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 4. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 5. Verify that filters are installed. 6. Purge gas line. 7. Inspect and adjust vibration isolators. 8. Verify bearing lubrication. 9. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and

binding. 10. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.

C. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.


Hope House


237423 - Page 12

1. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report. 2. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify

sequences. 3. Operate unit for run-in period recommended by manufacturer. 4. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing, and

adjust burner for peak efficiency:

a. Measure gas pressure at manifold. b. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber. c. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum

firing rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.

5. Calibrate thermostats. 6. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. 7. Inspect dampers, if any, for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers. 8. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration,

and normal and emergency shutdown. 9. Measure and record airflow. Plot fan volumes on fan curve. 10. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot-operation and failure modes.

Inspect the following:

a. High-limit heat. b. Alarms.

11. After startup and performance testing, change filters, verify bearing lubrication, and adjust belt tension.

12. Verify drain-pan performance. 13. Verify outdoor-air damper operation.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.

B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to 2 visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain heating and ventilating units.



Hope House

SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS 238126 - Page 1

SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat-pump units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.


C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.



B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: One set for each air-handling unit.


Hope House




B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems."

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 2. For Compressor: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. For Parts: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 4. For Labor: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: Verify that manufacturers retained in the list below make combination of unit components retained. 1. Daikin. 2. Trane; a business of American Standard companies. (Basis of Design). 3. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.

2.2 INDOOR UNITS

A. Wall-mounted, Fan Components:

1. Cabinet: Enamel Steel with removable panels on front and/or ends. Color selected by Architect.

2. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-expansion valve. Comply with ARI 210/240.





Hope House


3. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements; with refractory ceramic support bushings, automatic-reset thermal cutout, built-in magnetic contactors, manual-reset thermal cutout, airflow proving device, and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection.

4. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal. 5. Fan Motors:

a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

b. Multi-tapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.

c. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.

6. Filters: Permanent, cleanable. 7. Condensate Drain Pans:

a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection.

1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face. 2) Depth: A minimum of 1inch deep.

b. Single-wall, galvanized-steel sheet. c. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent

overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.

1) Minimum Connection Size: NPS 3/4.

d. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound. e. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect

condensate from top coil.

2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS

A. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:

1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.

a. Compressor Type: Scroll. b. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A. c. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and

liquid subcooler. Comply with ARI 210/240.


Hope House


3. Heat-Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature-air cutoff thermostat.

4. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor. 5. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. 6. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Thermostat: Wall mounted Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan, provide with wall thermostat / controller guard.

B. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.

C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.

D. Drain Hose: For condensate.

E. Factory wired condensate lift pump. Raise drain water min. 33” (for ceiling cassettes) or condesate lift pump as required by the manufacturer shipped loose and installed by the mechanical contractor.

F. Wind Baffle Kit for low ambient controls.

G. Air Cooled Condensing unit Mini Split Stand as manufactured by “Big Foot Systems” or equivalent.

2.5 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. See Schedules on Drawings:

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure.

C. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch-thick, reinforced concrete base that is 6inches larger, on each side, than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.

D. Install and connect pre-charged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit.


Hope House


3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit.

C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.


C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.


D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.



October 10, 2017

Hope House

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM 238126 - Page 1

SECTION 238126 - VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Extent of system work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and

by requirements of this section.

B. Types of split system cooling units specified in this section include the following:

1. Variable capacity heat pump heat recovery air conditioning system.

C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section.

1. Other sections of Division 23 for piping, specialties, pumps, valves, field-installed

automatic temperature controls, vibration isolation, and field applied insulation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. The units shall be listed by Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label.

B. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.).

C. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO14001 which is a

set of standards applying to environmental protection set by the International Standard

Organization (ISO).

D. All units must meet or exceed the 2010 Federal minimum efficiency requirements and the

ASHRAE 90.1 efficiency requirements for VRF systems. Efficiency shall be published in

accordance with the Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) Standards

340/360, 1230 and ISO Standard 13256-1.

E. A full charge of R-410A for the condensing unit only shall be provided in the condensing unit.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING


1.6 WARRANTY

A. The entire system shall be covered by an extended manufacturer’s limited parts warranty for

a period of five (5) years from date of installation. In addition, the compressor shall have a

manufacturer’s limited parts warranty for a period of seven (7) years from date of installation.

If, during this period, any part should fail to function properly due to defects in workmanship

or material, it shall be replaced or repaired at the discretion of the manufacturer. A

manufacturer’s written warranty statement must be provided prior to system approval.

B. The VRF system shall be installed by a contractor with extensive install and service training.

The mandatory contractor service and install training should be performed by the

manufacturer

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VARIABLE CAPACITY HEAT PUMP HEAT RECOVERY AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Dakin AC.

2. Trane.

3. Mitsubishi Electric – City Multi product series.

2.2 GENERAL

A. The system shall consist of simultaneous heating and cooling outdoor units, BC (Branch

Circuit) controllers, multiple indoor units, and M-NET DDC (Direct Digital Controls), per

equipment schedules. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be capable of

operating in any mode independently of other indoor units or groups. System shall be

capable of changing mode (cooling to heating, heating to cooling) with no interruption to

system operation. To ensure Owner comfort, each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall

be independently controlled and capable of changing mode automatically when zone

temperature strays 1.8°F from setpoint for ten (10) minutes. The sum of connected

capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 150% of outdoor rated capacity.

B. The basis of design system is a two-pipe system. If an alternate manufacturer is selected,

any additional material, cost, and labor to install additional refrigerant lines, branch

controllers, fittings, or other required components shall be incurred by the installing


October 10, 2017

Hope House


contractor. The installing contractor shall be responsible for additional costs incurred by

other contractors and subcontractors as a result of installing an alternate manufacturer’s

system. The installing contractor must provide complete drawings and documentation

identifying all differences between the alternate manufacturer and the basis-of-design

system, subject to Engineer’s approval.

2.3 HEAT RECOVERY OUTDOOR UNIT

A. General:

1. The outdoor units shall be used specifically with VRF components. The outdoor

units shall be equipped with multiple circuit boards that interface to the VRF controls

system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation. Each outdoor unit

module shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired, and run tested at

the factory.

a. The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from

50% to 150% of outdoor-rated capacity.

b. Outdoor unit shall be capable of up to 150% connected capacity for future

expansion.

c. Outdoor unit shall have a sound rating no higher than 58 dB(A). If an

alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to

meet published sound levels shall be incurred by the Contractor.

d. Both refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the BC (Branch Circuit)

controllers shall be insulated.

e. Outdoor unit shall be able to connect to up to 50 indoor units depending

upon model.

f. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator with refrigerant level sensors

and controls.

g. The outdoor unit shall have a high pressure safety switch, over-current

protection, crankcase heater and DC bus protection.

h. The outdoor unit shall have rated performance of heating operation at -4°F

ambient temperatures and cooling mode down to 23°F ambient

temperatures, without additional low ambient controls. If an alternate

manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to meet

low ambient operating condition and performance shall be incurred by the

Contractor and subject to Owner and Engineer approval.

i. The outdoor unit shut-off temperature shall be able to operate in heating

mode down to outdoor temperature of -18°F.

j. The outdoor unit shall have a high efficiency oil separator plus additional

logic controls to ensure adequate oil volume in the compressor is

maintained.

k. The outdoor unit shall be provided with a manufacturer-supplied 20 gauge

hot-dipped galvanized snow/hail guard. The snow/hail guard protects the

outdoor coil surfaces from hail damage and snow build-up in severe

climates.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


l. Unit must defrost all circuits simultaneously in order to resume full heating

more quickly. Partial defrost, which may extend "no or reduced heating"

periods, shall not be allowed.

m. Manufacturer shall provide outdoor unit mounting rails similar to Big Foot

Systems with spring vibration isolation. Mounting rails shall be weather-

resistant, hot-dip galvanized with a glass-filled nylon base. Rails shall be

minimum 14 in. high with an open base.

B. Heat Interchanger Circuit:

1. The outdoor unit shall contain a heat interchanger circuit for sub-cooling liquid prior

to entering the outdoor coil during the heating mode.

2. The interchanger shall be of a copper tube within a tube construction.

3. The interchanger circuit refrigerant flow shall be controlled by an electronic

expansion valve.

C. Unit Cabinet:

1. The casing(s) shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished.

D. Fan:

1. Each outdoor unit module shall be furnished with one (1) direct drive, variable

speed propeller-type fan. The fan shall be factory set for operation under 0 in. WG

external static pressure but capable of normal operation under a maximum of 0.24

in. WG external static pressure via dipswitch.

2. All fan motors shall have inherent protection, have permanently lubricated bearings,

and be completely variable speed.

3. All fan motors shall be mounted for quiet operation.

4. All fans shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts.

5. The outdoor unit shall have vertical discharge airflow.

E. Refrigerant:

1. R410A refrigerant shall be required.

2. Polyolester (POE) oil shall be required. Prior to bidding, manufacturers using

alternate oil types shall submit material safety data sheets (MSDS) and comparison

of hygroscopic properties for alternate oil with list of local suppliers stocking

alternate oil for approval at least two (2) weeks prior to bidding.

F. Coil:

1. The outdoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate

fins on copper tubing.

2. The coil fins shall have a factory applied, corrosion resistant blue-fin finish.

3. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard.

4. Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of an inverter-

driven compressor.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


5. The outdoor coil shall include four (4) circuits with two-position valves for each

circuit, except for the last stage.

G. Basepan Heater:

1. Each outdoor unit module shall be equipped with a basepan heater. Basepan

heater shall activate only when compressor is operating in heating mode at an

outdoor ambient temperature of 39°F or below. If an alternate manufacturer is

selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to meet basepan heater condition

and performance shall be incurred by the Contractor.

H. Compressor:

1. Each outdoor unit module shall be equipped with one (1) inverter-driven scroll

hermetic compressor. Non-inverter-driven compressors, which cause inrush

current (demand charges) and require larger wire sizing, shall not be allowed.

2. A crankcase heater(s) shall be factory mounted on the compressor(s).

3. The outdoor unit compressor shall have an inverter to modulate capacity. The

capacity shall be completely variable with a turndown of 17% of rated capacity.

4. The compressor will be equipped with an internal thermal overload.

5. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.

6. Field-installed oil equalization lines between modules are not allowed. Prior to

bidding, manufacturers requiring equalization must submit oil line sizing calculations

specific to each system and module placement for this project.

I. Controls:

1. The outdoor unit shall have the capability of up to eight (8) levels of demand control

for each refrigerant system.

J. Electrical:

1. The outdoor unit electrical power shall be as scheduled.

2. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors.

3. The control circuit between the indoor units, BC Controller and the outdoor unit shall

be 24VDC completed using a two-conductor, twisted-pair shielded cable to provide

total integration of the system.

2.4 BRANCH CONTROLLERS (BRANCH DEVICES)

A. General:

1. The branch controllers shall include multiple branches to allow simultaneous

heating and cooling by allowing either hot gas refrigerant to flow to indoor unit(s) for

heating or sub-cooled liquid refrigerant to flow to indoor unit(s) for cooling.

2. The units shall be equipped with a circuit board that interfaces to the controls

system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation. The unit shall have

a galvanized steel finish. The branch controllers shall be completely factory


October 10, 2017

Hope House


assembled, piped and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory. The units

shall be mounted indoors, with access and service clearance provided for each

controller.

3. Each branch device, regardless of manufacturer, must be installed in the

designated areas as indicated on the project drawings. Installation of branch

devices outside of these areas is not allowed.

4. Each branch device shall include at least two (2) unused branch for future use. If

the manufacturer does not offer spare branches, two (2) additional branch devices

must be provided and installed for each refrigeration system. Branches shall be

fully installed and wired in designated areas with capped service shutoff valve and

service port.

5. Each port on the branch devices shall be provided with a ball valve.

B. Unit Cabinet:

1. The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel.

2. Each cabinet shall house a liquid-gas separator, multiple refrigeration control

valves, and tube-in-tube heat exchanger(s).

C. Refrigerant Valves:

1. The unit shall be furnished with multiple two-position refrigerant valves.

2. When connecting a 54,000 BTU/h or larger indoor unit section, two (2) branch

circuits shall be joined together at the branch controller to deliver an appropriate

amount of refrigerant. The two (2) refrigerant valves shall operate simultaneously.

3. Linear electronic expansion valves shall be used to control the variable refrigerant

flow.

D. Integral Drain Pan:

1. An integral condensate pan and drain connection shall be provided.

E. Electrical:

1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, one-phase, 60 Hz.

2. The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187 to 228

volts (208V/60 Hz) or 207-253V (230V/60 Hz).

3. The unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


2.5 FLOOR CONSOLE UNIT

A. General:

1. Indoor unit shall be a floor or low wall mounted console fan coil unit, operable with

refrigerant R-410A, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation

within a conditioned space. It shall have a top discharge air grill and resin net mold

resistant filtered bottom return air. The cabinets can be mounted on the floor with

refrigerant and condensate lines directed downward or affixed to the wall with

horizontal refrigerant and condensate knockouts. Computerized PID control shall

be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition.

The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies

while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control

BRC1E73. A mold-resistant, resin net air filter shall be included as standard

equipment. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 35 dB(A) to 40 dB(A)

at high speed measured at 5 feet away and 5 feet high

B. Indoor Unit:

1. The Daikin indoor unit FXLQ shall be completely factory assembled and

tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional

expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare

connections, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time

delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have an auto-swing louver which

ensures efficient air distribution, which closes automatically when the unit

stops.

2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to

shipment from the factory.

3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit.

4. Return air shall be through a resin net mold resistant filter.

5. Condensate draining shall be made via gravity or external condensate

pump.

6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor.

7. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz.

8. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum.

C. Unit Cabinet:

1. All casings, regardless of model size, shall have the same white finish.

2. Multi directional drain and refrigerant piping offering four (4) directions for

refrigerant piping and two (2) directions for draining shall be standard.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


3. There shall be a separate back plate which secures the unit firmly to the wall.

D. Fan:

1. The fan shall be direct –drive Sirocco type fan, statically and dynamically balanced

impeller with high and low fan speeds available,

2. The fan motor shall operator on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor

output range 0.034 to 0.047 HP.

E. Filter:

1. Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable, washable filter.

F. Coil:

1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded

into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.

2. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections.

G. Electrical:

1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz.

2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-

228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz).

H. Accessories:

1. Provide condensate lift pump (Model DACA_CP1-3)

I. Controls:

1. The unit shall have a factory built input functions necessary to operate the system.

2. The unit shall be compatible with the Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager advanced

multi-zone controller.

2.6 WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNIT

A. General:

1. The unit shall be a wall-mounted indoor unit section and shall have a modulating

linear expansion device and a flat front. The unit shall support individual control

using DDC controllers.

B. Indoor Unit:


October 10, 2017

Hope House


1. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within

the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion

device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic

function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, and a test run

switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air

before shipment from the factory.

C. Unit Cabinet:

1. All casings, regardless of model size, shall have the same white finish.

2. Multi directional drain and refrigerant piping offering four (4) directions for

refrigerant piping and two (2) directions for draining shall be standard.

3. There shall be a separate back plate which secures the unit firmly to the wall.

D. Fan:

1. The indoor fan shall be an assembly with one or two line-flow fan(s) direct driven by

a single motor.

2. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with

permanently lubricated bearings.

3. A manual adjustable guide vane shall be provided with the ability to change the

airflow from side to side (left to right).

4. A motorized air sweep louver shall provide an automatic change in airflow by

directing the air up and down to provide uniform air distribution.

E. Filter:


F. Coil:

1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper

tubing.

2. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange.

3. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy.

4. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory.

5. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil.

6. Both refrigerant lines to the indoor units shall be insulated.

G. Electrical:




H. Controls:

1. The unit shall have a factory built input functions necessary to operate the

system.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


2. The unit shall be compatible with the Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager

advanced multi-zone controller.

2.7 VERTICAL AIR HANDLER

A. General:

1. Daikin indoor unit FXTQ_PA shall be a floor mounted vertical or horizontal right air

handling unit, operable with refrigerant R-410A, equipped with an electronic

expansion valve and direct-drive ECM type fan with auto CFM adjustment, for

installation within a conditioned space. When installed in a vertical configuration it

shall have top discharge air and bottom return air. When installed in a horizontal

right configuration it shall have a horizontal discharge air and horizontal return air.

This compact design with pre-painted heavy-gauge steel casing shall be available in

capacities from 12,000 Btu/h to 54,000 Btu/h. Model numbers are FXTQ12PAVJU

to be connected to outdoor unit model REYQ heat recovery model. Computerized

PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room

temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying

mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when

used with Daikin remote control BRC1E73.

B. Indoor Unit:

1. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained

within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear

expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a

self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart

function, and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be

charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. The Daikin

indoor unit FXTQ_PA components shall be completely factory assembled

and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic

proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal

protector, brazed connections, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-

minute fused time delay, and test run switch.

2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to

shipment from the factory.

3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit.

4. Return air shall be through an optional or field supplied filter.

5. Condensate draining shall be made via gravity or external condensate

pump.

6. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz.

7. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


C. Unit Cabinet:

1. All casings, regardless of model size, shall have the same white finish. The

cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing, foil-faced insulation to

control air leakage.

2. Select an installation location with adequate structural support, space for

service access and clearance for air return and supply duct connections.

3. A field supplied secondary drain pan must be installed

D. Fan:

1. A motorized air sweep louver shall provide an automatic change in airflow by

directing the air up and down to provide uniform air distribution. The fan

shall be a direct-drive Sirocco type fan, statically and dynamically balanced

impeller with high and low fan speeds available.

2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor

output range 0.2 to 0.5 HP.

3. The airflow rate shall be available in high setting.

4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected.

1.

E. Filter:


F. Coil:

1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes

expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.

2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore

tube design to ensure highly efficient performance.

3. The coil shall be a 4-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 15 fpi design

completely factory tested.

4. The refrigerant connections shall be brazed connections and the

condensate will be 3/4 inch outside diameter PVC.

5. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.

G. Electrical:





October 10, 2017

Hope House


H. Controls:

1. The unit shall have a factory built input functions necessary to operate the

system.

2. The unit shall be compatible with the Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager

advanced multi-zone controller.

2.8 CONTROLS

A. Overview

1. General

a. BRC1E73: Navigation (NAV) Remote Controller. The NAV Remote controller

can provide control for all VRF indoor units. The remote controller wiring

consist of a non-polar two-wire connection to the indoor unit at terminals

P1/P2. The NAV Remote Controller is wall mounted and can be adjusted to

maintain the optimal operation of the connected indoor unit(s). The NAV

Remote control does not need to be addressed.

B. Electrical characteristics

1. General

a. The CMCN shall operate at 30VDC. Controller power and communications

shall be via a common non-polar communications bus.

2. Wiring

a. Control wiring shall be installed in a daisy-chain configuration from indoor

unit to indoor unit, to the BC controller (main and subs, if applicable) and to

the outdoor unit. Control wiring to remote controllers shall be run from the

indoor unit terminal block to the controller associated with that unit.

b. Control wiring for the Simple MA remote controllers shall be from the remote

controller (receiver) to the first associated indoor unit (TB-15) then to the

remaining associated indoor units (TB-15) in a daisy-chain configuration.

c. Control wiring for centralized controllers shall be installed in a daisy-chain

configuration from outdoor unit to outdoor unit, to the system controllers

(centralized controllers and/or integrated web-based interface), to the power

supply.

d. The centralized controller shall be capable of being networked with other

centralized controllers.

3. Wiring Type

a. Wiring shall be two-conductor (#16 AWG), twisted, stranded, shielded wire

as defined by the Diamond System Builder output.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


b. Network wiring shall be CAT-5 with RJ-45 connection.

C. Remote Controller

1. Backlit Simple MA Remote Controller

a. The Backlit Simple MA Remote Controller shall be capable of controlling up

to 16 indoor units (defined as one (1) group). The Backlit Simple MA

Remote Controller shall be compact in size, approximately 3 in. x 5 in. and

have limited user functionality. The Backlit Simple MA supports temperature

display selection of Fahrenheit or Celsius. The Backlit Simple MA Remote

Controller shall allow the user to change on/off, mode (cool, heat, auto, dry,

setback (R2/WR2-Series only) and fan), temperature setting, and fan speed

setting and airflow direction. The Backlit Simple MA Remote Controller shall

be able to limit the set temperature range from the Backlit Simple MA. The

Backlit Simple MA Remote controller shall be capable of night setback

control with upper and lower set temperature settings. The room

temperature shall be sensed at either the Backlit Simple MA Remote

Controller or the Indoor Unit dependent on the indoor unit dipswitch setting.

The Backlit Simple MA Remote Controller shall display a four-digit error

code in the event of system abnormality/error. The Backlit Simple MA

Remote Controller shall be capable of up to two (2) remote controllers per

group. The Backlit Simple MA Remote Controller shall require no

addressing.

The Backlit Simple MA Remote Controller shall connect using two-wire,

stranded, non-polar control wire to the connection terminal on the indoor

unit. The Simple MA Remote Controller shall require cross-over wiring for

grouping across indoor units.

2.9 COPPER PIPING for R410A

A. GENERAL

1. The refrigerant pipe shall be of de-oxidized phosphorous seamless copper pipe

conforming to JIS H300-C1220T. Both suction gas and liquid lines should be

sufficiently insulated to prevent formation of condensation in all circumstances.

These pipes will be brazed with hard `Silver` solder. Copper Piping for R410A

Soldering work should avoid any upward direction in order to avoid leakage. The

recommendable oil for pipe processing must be a synthetic oil (ether oil, ester oil,

alkyl benzene oil or a mixture of these).

2. Tools used for R410A like gauges, gas leak detector, vacuum pump should be

dedicated for R410A and cannot be used for R22 to avoid mineral oil contamination.

3. Piping size selection and only R410A refnets

4. The 3 rules of refrigerant piping: Dry, Clean and Airtight must be strictly observed

during the piping work. At all times pipes should be covered or even pinched to

avoid moisture.

5. Flushing both gas and liquid pipes with Nitrogen will be used as a standard working

practice.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


B. Thermal Insulation

1. The thermal insulation materials used must be well able to withstand the heat from

the pipes and the local fire protection codes. The insulation of jointed pipes such as

soldered, flared or flanged sections should only be carried out after the successful

completion of the airtight test.

2. Attention should be paid to the unit model and the operating conditions. Liquid,

suction, and discharge pipe runs have to be insulated. Thickness of insulation

material for pipe sections up to 1” insulation thickness should be minimum ½”, for

larger pipe sections >1” the thickness should be increased to 5/8” or larger.

3. When the VRV system will operate at external temperatures below 50F the liquid

pipe runs have to be insulated.

C. Flare Connection

1. A pipe cutter will be used to cut the pipe, burrs should be removed carefully. Flare

sizes, as determined in SI 62

2. Appropriate amount of torque will be used to tighten the flare nut, ref SI62. Two

Spanners should be used to grip the pipe.

D. Flange connection on Outdoor unit

1. The flange must be clean and undamaged; the flange surface should be coated

with non-mineral refrigeration oil before the bolts are tightened.

E. Refrigerant charge

1. The calculation method, based on `as-built` piping lengths, will be used before

charging. After the airtight test, where a pressure of 3.2 M PA cannot decrease for

24 hours, a double step vacuum drying will be executed. Small minor leaks cannot

be detected if the pressure test is not executed for at least 24 hours. If there is no

drop in pressure the test is acceptable.

2. In case of pressure drop the possible leak has to be detected by pressurizing with

N2.

3. After the leak test the vacuum drying method in 2 steps will be executed. First

vacuum drying will be done for 2 hours, vacuum will be broken with N2 only, a

second vacuum test will be executed until the vacuum grade is –755 mmHg or

lower is reached, the vacuum will be broken the charging process can be started.

4. R410A will be charged in liquid phase using a weighing scale plus dedicated gauge

manifold and charging hose. The added amount of refrigerant will be recorded on

the outdoor unit.

5. Local codes with reference to possible refrigerant leakage must be respected.

2.10 DRAIN PIPING

A. All indoor units equipped with a drain pump require the installation of the flexible drain hose

and clamp delivered with the fan coil unit. This drain hose will be connected to the

drainpipes that will have a downward slope of 1/100. The working of the drain pump can be


October 10, 2017

Hope House


tested by using the test mode of the fan coil unit and adding water in the drain pan .The

drain pipe should be at least equal in size to that of the fan coil unit and thermally insulated

to prevent any condensation.

B. All fan coil units whose drain connection is subjected to negative pressure should be fitted

with an individual drain trap; this trap must allow future cleaning.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which system units are to be installed. Do not

proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable

to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM UNITS

A. General: Install units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units

plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's

recommended clearances.

B. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be

factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to electrical

installer.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal

and installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment

start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.

C. Air-Cooled Condenser Piping: Provide factory sized precharged piping.

D. Drain Piping: Connect condensate pump discharge to waste as indicated, with unions and

shutoff valves.


A. General: Start-up units, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test

controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.4 SPARE PARTS

A. General: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts for each packaged unit:

1. One set filters for each unit.


October 10, 2017

Hope House


3.5 TRAINING

A. Provide 4 hours of on-site training to building service personnel. Training to include all

system operations, seasonal start-up and shut-down, monitoring and adjustment of system

controls, and on-site troubleshooting.

END OF SECTION


Hope House

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - Page 1

SECTION 260500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Supporting devices for electrical components.2. Electrical metering components.3. Electrical demolition.4. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.5. Touchup painting.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and marked for intended use.

B. Contractor shall provide U.L. labels as required for all new equipment.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general constructionwork and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate theelectrical installations that follow.

1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and otherstructural components as they are constructed.

B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment forefficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioningbefore closing in the building.


Hope House


C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealedby finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section"Access Doors."

D. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinateinstallation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.

E. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acousticalceilings and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceilinginstallation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.

C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Comply with Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications"for slotted channel framing.

1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel

supports.

D. Raceway Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clampsor click-type hangers. Perforated hangers or wire-tie supports are not acceptable. Allhangers and supports shall have corrosion resistant finish.

E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plainends.

F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting ofthreaded body and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riserconduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suitindividual risers. Body constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanizedfinish.

G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.

H. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.


Hope House


2.2 TOUCHUP PAINT

A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installedequipment finish.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are notindicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximumpossible headroom.

B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular toother building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement ofcomponents. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with otherinstallations.

D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION

A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system components.

B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.

C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.

D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safetyfactor of at least four; minimum of 200-lb design load.

3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electricalcomponents.

B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways.Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hangerassemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits.


Hope House


C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-typehangers.

D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25percent minimum in the future.

E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers orclamps.

F. Install 1/4-inch-diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwiseindicated.

G. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductorsis carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.

H. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.

I. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixturesupport. Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by barhangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the boxand support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches from thebox.

J. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches,control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unlesscomponents are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.

K. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unlesscore-drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations ofmasonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wallassemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.

L. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unlessotherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless otherfastening methods are indicated:

1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid

masonry units.3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.5. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.

a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

6. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits,pipe straps, or other items.

7. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.8. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25

percent of its proof-test load.


Hope House


3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wallassemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer’s writteninstallation instructions and published drawings for products and applicationsindicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required tosupport fill materials during their application and in the position needed to producecross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and otheraccessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the followingresults:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, andpenetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contract and adhere to substrates formed by openingsand penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to producesmooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfacesrequired to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics oftrades involved.

B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacentundisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has beendisturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics oftrades involved.


A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:

1. Supporting devices for electrical components.2. Concrete bases.3. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.4. Touchup painting.


Hope House


3.7 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements arespecified in Division 09 Section "Painting."

1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finishcoats to suit the degree of damage at each location.

2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and fortiming and application of successive coats.

3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended bymanufacturer.

4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coatingrecommended by manufacturer.

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposedfinish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.

B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings,finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of SubstantialCompletion.



Hope House

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS ANDCABLES

260519 - Page 1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.


1. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systemscommunications cables and Class 1, 2 and 3 control cables.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NFPA 70, NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 and ASTMB 8 for stranded copper conductors.

B. Aluminum Conductors: Comply with NFPA 70, NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658, andASTM B 800 and ASTM B 801 for stranded aluminum conductors.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 forType THHN/THWN-2 and Type SO.

D. Multi-conductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for metal-cladcable, Type MC and Type SO with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating,material, type, and class for application and service indicated.


Hope House


260519 - Page 2



B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feedersNo. 4 AWG and larger. Conductors shall be solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller;stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWGand larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS ANDWIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway, mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces:Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. MC feeder cable shall bepermitted for feeder runs from tenant meters to dwelling units.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, singleconductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2,single conductors in raceway, Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

G. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN/THWN-2, singleconductors in raceway.

H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord withstainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.


Hope House


260519 - Page 3

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination pointsaccording to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior topulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary;compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceedmanufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips,that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structuralmembers, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for ElectricalSystems."

G. Metal Clad Cable (MC) may be used for branch circuits only when approved by thelocal authority having jurisdiction and only for concealed branch circuit wiring startingten (10) feet maximum from the first wiring device (Junction box is not a device) off of arigid metallic homerun raceway.

H. Metal Clad Cable (MC) shall not be used for branch circuit home runs, and shall not beused for feeders except from tenant meters to dwelling unit load centers.

I. Metal Clad Cable (MC) shall be installed concealed for branch circuit power includingreceptacles and lighting in the following areas:

1. Wiring above ceilings.2. Wiring in metal stud and drywall walls.3. Rigid metallic raceway shall stub out from panelboards into accessible ceilings to

within ten (10) feet maximum of the first wiring device (junction box is not adevice). Rigid metallic raceway shall also be installed in block walls and in allexposed areas for similar branch circuiting.

4. All metal clad cable shall be securely fastened to building frame on centers notexceeding six (6) feet and within 12” of every outlet box or fitting with “Caddy”type fasteners or approved equal means.

5. All fittings used for metal clad cable shall be UL approved for the usage.

J. Metal clad cable (MC) shall be provided with a full-size insulated equipment groundingconductor.

K. Metal clad cable (MC) shall contain copper conductors for branch circuits, copper oraluminum conductors for feeders as permitted by paragraphs above.


Hope House


260519 - Page 4

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's publishedtorque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use thosespecified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material andthat possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings thanunspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553"Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of otherend of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for ElectricalRaceways and Cabling."

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies torestore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413"Penetration Firestopping."



1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has beenenergized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance withrequirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETAAcceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.


Hope House


260519 - Page 5

3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days afterFinal Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessibleto portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scanof each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measuretemperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Providecalibration record for device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifiessplices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation ofdeficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations afterremedial action.

B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used.2. Results that comply with requirements.3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to

achieve compliance with requirements.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



Hope House

CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - Page 1

SECTION 260523 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. UTP cabling.2. EIA-485 cabling.3. Low-voltage control cabling.4. Control-circuit conductors.5. Identification products.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Source quality-control reports.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS




A. Flame Travel and Smoke Density in Plenums: As determined by testing identicalproducts according to NFPA 262 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products forinstallation in plenums with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame Travel Distance: 60 inches or less.2. Peak Optical Smoke Density: 0.5 or less.3. Average Optical Smoke Density: 0.15 or less.

B. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Riser Cables in Non-Plenum Building Spaces: Asdetermined by testing identical products according to UL 1666.


Hope House


C. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Cables in Non-Riser Applications and Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according toUL 1685.

2.3 BACKBOARDS

A. Description: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches unless otherwisenoted. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Section 061000"Rough Carpentry."

B. Painting: Paint plywood on all sides and edges with flat eggshell latex paint. Complywith requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

2.4 UTP CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:

1. ADC.2. Alpha Wire Company; a division of Belden Inc.3. Belden Inc.4. CommScope, Inc.5. Draka Cableteq USA.6. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.7. Mohawk; a division of Belden Inc.8. Nexans; Berk-Tek Products.9. Siemon Company (The).10. Superior Essex Inc.11. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand.12. 3M.13. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP.

1. Comply with ICEA S-102-700 for mechanical properties of Category 6 cables.2. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 for performance specifications.3. Comply with TIA-568-C.2, Category 6.4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as

complying with NEMA WC 66, UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP complying with UL 1685.b. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMP or Type CMR in metallic conduit

installed per NFPA 70, Article 300.22, "Wiring in Ducts, Plenums, andOther Air-Handling Spaces."


Hope House


2.5 UTP CABLE HARDWARE


1. ADC.2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.3. Belden Inc.4. Dynacom Inc.5. Hubbell Incorporated.6. Leviton Commercial Networks Division.7. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.8. Panduit Corp.9. Siemon Company (The).10. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2,IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall beterminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number ofcables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies,including plugs and jacks where indicated.

D. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-typeconnectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

E. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair,eight-position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.1.

F. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables terminated with eight-position modularplug at each end.

1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons toensure Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protectagainst snagging.

2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.

G. Faceplates:

1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Section 262726"Wiring Devices."

2. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical-fiber,and coaxial work area cords.

a. Flush-mounted jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.


Hope House


H. Legend:

1. Factory labeled by silk-screening or engraving.2. Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.3. Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.

2.6 EIA-485 CABLE

A. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.3. Shielded or Unshielded.4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket.5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262.

2.7 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE

A. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. Multi-pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors.2. PVC insulation.3. Shielded or Unshielded.4. PVC jacket.5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

2.8 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN, in raceway,complying with UL 83.

B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway,complying with UL 83.

C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway, complying with UL 83.

D. Class 2 Control Circuits and Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits That SupplyCritical Circuits: Circuit Integrity (CI) cable.

1. Smoke control signaling and control circuits.


Hope House



A. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA-568-C.2.

B. Factory test optical-fiber cables according to TIA-568-C.3.

C. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Test cables on receipt at Project site.

1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for ElectricalSystems" for raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits, andwireways as supplemented or modified in this Section.

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2inches deep.

2. Outlet boxes for optical-fiber cables shall be no smaller than 4 inches square by1-1/2 inches deep with extension ring sized to bring edge of ring to within 1/8inch of the finished wall surface.

3. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

B. Comply with TIA-569-B for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bendsbetween pull points.

C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.

D. Raceway Installation in Equipment Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece ofplywood is installed, or in the corner of the room if multiple sheets of plywood areinstalled around perimeter walls of the room.

2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.3. Secure conduits to backboard if entering the room from overhead.4. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor.5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding

conductor to grounding system.

E. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheetstightly and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.


Hope House


3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 70.

B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C Series of standards.2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems" and

Ch. 6, "Optical Fiber Structured Cabling Systems."3. Terminate all conductors and optical fibers; no cable shall contain unterminated

elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and patchpanels.

4. Cables may not be spliced.5. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more

than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding

manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified inBICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems" and Ch. 6, "OpticalFiber Structured Cabling Systems." Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splicecable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable ifdamaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

8. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling.Do not use heat lamps for heating.

9. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured CablingSystems" and Ch. 6, "Optical Fiber Structured Cabling Systems." Monitor cablepull tensions.

10. Support: Do not allow cables to lie on removable ceiling tiles.11. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and

installed so as to not damage cables.

C. UTP Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C.2.

2. Install termination hardware as specified in Section 271500 "CommunicationsHorizontal Cabling" unless otherwise indicated.

3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch at the point of termination tomaintain cable geometry.

D. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunicationsspaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches aboveceilings by cable supports not more than 30 inches apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through or on structural members or in contact with pipes,ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Do not run cables between structuralmembers and corrugated panels.


Hope House


E. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separatingunshielded copper voice and data communications cable from potential EMIsources including electrical power lines and equipment.

3.4 Pathways: All wiring run through areas with exposed ceilings shall be run in conduit.Reference drawing notes.

3.5 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables. Abandoned conductors and cables arethose installed that are not terminated at equipment and are not identified for future usewith a tag.

3.6 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits; No 14 AWG.2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits; No. 16 AWG.3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits; No 12 AWG.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping" Chapter.

3.8 GROUNDING

A. For data communication wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and withBICSI TDMM, "Bonding and Grounding (Earthing)" Chapter.

B. For low-voltage control wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."


Hope House


3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identificationfor Electrical Systems."

B. Identify data and communications system components, wiring, and cabling accordingto TIA-606-A; label printers shall use label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inkscomplying with UL 969.



1. Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certificationmarkings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pinassignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding,equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Test UTP cabling for direct-current loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittentfaults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars inconnection blocks. Test cables after termination but not after cross-connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performancerequirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying withmeasurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)"Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by testequipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

B. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary reportthat is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data fromthe instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests andinspections.




Hope House

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - Page 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC.3. ERICO International Corporation.4. Fushi Copperweld Inc.5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC.6. Harger Lightning and Grounding.7. ILSCO.8. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group.9. Robbins Lightning, Inc.10. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.


Hope House


2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwiserequired by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in

diameter.5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated

with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction forapplications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations ofconductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kitmanufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, sectional type; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and strandedconductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWGminimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.


Hope House


C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as

otherwise indicated.3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall beconnected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral andground buses.

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition tothose required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.2. Lighting circuits.3. Receptacle circuits.4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.6. Flexible raceway runs.7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from

grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipmentgrounding bar terminal on busway.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners,heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor toeach unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulatedequipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable.Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

E. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and aseparate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductorinstalled with branch-circuit conductors.


Hope House


F. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2.

1. Grounding Conductor: Bare, copper, not less than No. 8 AWG.2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding

jumper.3. Barbed Wire: Strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unlessotherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placingconductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electricalpower system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor atclosest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sizedsame as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final gradeunless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and asotherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damagingcoating if any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from othergrounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection andmaintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not topenetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports:Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-typeconnection is required, use a bolted clamp.

E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, inconduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metalwater service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to mainmetal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-typeconnector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where adielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on streetside of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor ateach end.


Hope House


2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypasswater meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream fromequipment shutoff valve.


A. Perform tests and inspections. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verifytightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrenchaccording to manufacturer's written instructions.



Hope House

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - Page 1

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensiveengineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performancerequirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight ofsupported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight ofsupported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loadscalculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of fivetimes the applied force.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations forthe following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.3. Equipment supports.

C. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "StructuralWelding Code - Steel."



Hope House


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated componentsfor field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.c. ERICO International Corporation.d. GS Metals Corp.e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.f. Unistrut; Atkore International.g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according toMFMA-4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyestercoating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according toMFMA-4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings,designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting ofthreaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electricalconductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape ofconductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported.Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steelplates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.


Hope House


F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electricalitems or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portlandcement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacitiesappropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Workinclude, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Hilti, Inc.2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.3) MKT Fastening, LLC.4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use inhardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacitiesappropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Workinclude, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.3) Hilti, Inc.4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar toMSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitablefor attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply withASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fitdimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steelshapes and plates.


Hope House


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports forelectrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Spacesupports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steelslotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent infuture without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be usedfor 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communicationsystems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specifiedin this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC,and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted inNFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components sostrength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specifiedloading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall beweight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchorand fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by thefollowing methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion

anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided

with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregateconcrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.


Hope House


6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying withMSS SP-69.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount

cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junctionboxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached tosubstrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoidreinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, andelevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger inboth directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 boltdiameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials,reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer'ssetting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished withitems to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supportedequipment.

3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.


Hope House


3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areasimmediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used forshop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-paintedsurfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" andSection 099123 "Interior Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds,bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and applygalvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



Hope House

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - Page 1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters.5. Surface raceways.6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-coverenclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations,sections, and attachment details.

C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the followingitems are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of itemsinvolved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups

with common supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled asdefined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended locationand application.

B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

C. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.


Hope House


E. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

F. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

G. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum.

H. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

I. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 andNFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel.b. Type: Setscrew or compression.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651,rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible externalbonding jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch,with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

J. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, byauthorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for useto lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance theirconductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed andlabeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intendedlocation and application.

B. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.

C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwiseindicated.

D. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

E. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.

F. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying withASTM D 3485.


Hope House


G. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing typeand material.

H. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

I. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/Lor less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPAMethod 24).

J. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and productrequirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice forthe Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-ScaleEnvironmental Chambers."

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 and Type 3Runless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location andapplication.

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate withwireways as required for complete system.

2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed andlabeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intendedlocation and application.

B. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape,without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket materialand fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shallbe flanged and have stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.

C. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and havingsnap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways asrequired for complete system.

E. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/Lor less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPAMethod 24).


Hope House


F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and productrequirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice forthe Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-ScaleEnvironmental Chambers."

2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways shall be listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location andapplication.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.

2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, andcabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy,Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

E. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal.2. Type: Fully adjustable.3. Shape: Rectangular.4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location andapplication.

F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lbshall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

G. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fanweighing 70 lb.

1. Listing and labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled asdefined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intendedlocation and application.

H. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

I. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773,cast aluminum with gasketed cover.


Hope House


J. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same materialas recessed box.

K. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep

L. Gangable boxes are allowed.

M. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 and Type 3Rwith continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standardenamel.

2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

N. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 and Type 3R galvanized-steel box with removable interiorpanel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standardenamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.3. Key latch to match panelboards.4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.7 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed andidentified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded ofsand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel,fiberglass, or a combination of the two.

1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with closed bottom unless otherwise

indicated.3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having

structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC."6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with

entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.


Hope House


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations

include the following:

a. Loading docks/parking areas.b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling

units.c. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except useLFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4

stainless steel in commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittingsunless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use withthis type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coatingafter installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fittingmanufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended bymanufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply

with NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.


Hope House


F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except whererequirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 foraluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed inspecific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for ElectricalSystems" for hangers and supports.

D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run exceptfor control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12inches of changes in direction.

F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwiseindicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

G. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to mainreinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close toslab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles withexpansion fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in alldirections.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved byArchitect for each specific location.

5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.

I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in

hubs or in an enclosure.

J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions:Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints.Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.


Hope House


K. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductivecompound prior to assembly.

L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulatingbushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outsideof boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size andinsulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminatedwith locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

N. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic linewith not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at eachend of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above gradealongside raceways in use.

O. Surface Raceways:

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inchradius control at bend points.2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight racewaysection. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's writteninstructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

P. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fillthem with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in aflush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent platesor surfaces.

Q. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so nofittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments.Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries ofrefrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

R. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmentaltemperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length thatexceeds 25 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listedfor each of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperaturechange.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperaturechange.


Hope House


c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125deg F temperature change.

d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inchper foot of length of straight run per degree F of temperature change for PVCconduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structureexpansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston settingselected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specificlocation at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansionmovement.

S. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipmentsubject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers andmotors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical

damage.

T. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are notindividually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with heightmeasured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

U. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell ofmasonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces toprovide a flat surface for a raintight connection between the box and cover plate or thesupported equipment and box.

V. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in thesame vertical channel.

W. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

X. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning twoframing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

Y. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not supportboxes by conduits.

Z. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

AA. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floorsurface.


Hope House


3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Preparetrench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work

toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move withexpansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmlyhand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength.After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make finalconduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compactionas specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-up at poles and equipment and atbuilding entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows forstub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles andequipment and at building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, andencase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches oneach side of the coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and whereconduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally aminimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Installinsulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553"Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depthcoordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required forproper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel,graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacentundisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Setcovers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, below grade.


Hope House


E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's writteninstructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Sizeholes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings areinstalled.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for ElectricalRaceways and Cabling."

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply withrequirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended bymanufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coatingrecommended by manufacturer.



Hope House

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260544 - Page 1

SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS ANDCABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction wallsand floors.

2. Sleeve-seal systems.3. Sleeve-seal fittings.4. Grout.5. Silicone sealants.


1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installedin fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, withand without penetrating items.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinccoated, plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-ironpressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with weldedlongitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.


Hope House


C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and withno side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one ormore sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.


A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular spacebetween sleeve and raceway or cable.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. CALPICO, Inc.c. Metraflex Company (The).d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.e. Proco Products, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of

length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.


A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made forembedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collarwith center opening to match piping OD.


a. Pre-sealed Systems.b. Link-Sealc. Innerlynx


Hope House


2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings innon-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting,dry, hydraulic-cement grout.



2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomericsealants of grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and otherhorizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed,expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete andMasonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using jointsealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply withrequirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing materialsolidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposedsurfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleevedopening.

3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve andraceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.


Hope House


4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openingsare used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length formounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inchesabove finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangularsleeved opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum boardassemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables withflexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using cast-iron pipesleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annularclear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves.Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable andsleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.


A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade atraceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer forraceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve.Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway orcable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements toexpand and make watertight seal.



B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabsand walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.





Hope House

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - Page 1

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways.2. Identification of power and control cables.3. Identification for conductors.4. Warning labels and signs.5. Instruction signs.6. Equipment identification labels.7. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, andinks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum lengthof color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.2. Legend: Indicate voltage.


Hope House


C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistantcoating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

D. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit,pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized tosuit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diametersized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by grippingaction.

F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet andcable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tagmanufacturer.

2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum lengthof color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.2. Legend: Indicate voltage.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather-and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securingends of legend label.

2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum lengthof color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather-and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securingends of legend label.


Hope House


C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet andcable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.


2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink markerrecommended by printer manufacturer.

D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylicsleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stayin place by gripping action.

E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylicsleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable itidentifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 milsthick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather-and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securingends of legend label.

C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuitidentification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

D. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet andcable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.


2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink markerrecommended by printer manufacturer.

2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch-wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clearvinyl overlay.

2.6 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.


Hope House


B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitiveadhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access toequipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend,and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size requiredfor application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2.7 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs upto 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalentprocess. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, bythermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.


Hope House


2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, bythermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

B. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed,with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials andapplication requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material andlocation (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steelmachine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenientviewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, usingmaterials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanicalfasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

E. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, atpenetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

F. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surfacepreparation and paint application.


Hope House


3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, andBranch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Install labels at 30-footmaximum intervals.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junctionand pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiringsystem legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Emergency Power.2. Power.3. UPS.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pulland junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape toidentify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Usecolors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory appliedb. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.

D. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungroundedconductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

E. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm,control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions,terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent withsystem used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams,and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

F. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape forpower, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in

raceway.


Hope House


G. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in thedirection of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mountedpanelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

H. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:Baked-enamel warning signs.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches.b. Controls with external control power connections.

I. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation andmaintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instructionsigns with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipmentoperation.

J. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designationlabel that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation andMaintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment,central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks ofeach system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal,monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unlessotherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letterson 1-1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine labelStenciled legend 4 inches high.

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to thoseappropriate for viewing from the floor.

d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels withappropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTLrating of the enclosure.



Hope House

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION 260573 - Page 1

SECTION 260573 – OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION/ ARC FLASHANALYSIS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective devicecoordination studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protectivedevice coordination study.

1. Coordination of series-rated devices is permitted where indicated on Drawings.

B. Provide Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per NFPA 70E – Standard for ElectricalSafety in the Workplace, reference Article 130.3 and Annex D.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer softwareprograms, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.

C. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approvalprocess for system protective devices has been completed.

1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input datasheets.

2. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports.3. Coordination-Study Report.4. Recommended Protective Device Settings.5. Arc Flash Hazard Report.


Hope House



A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wideuse. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guidesspecified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.

B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the applicationof computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similarmagnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

1. Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall beresponsible for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under thedirect supervision and control of engineer.

C. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.

D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

E. Comply with IEEE 1584 for Arc Flash Hazard Analysis procedure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – Not Applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electricaldistribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affectingperformance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.

1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals havebeen assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submittedand approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.

3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 26Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Useequipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution systemdiagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, andrecommended device settings.

2. Impedance of utility service entrance.


Hope House


3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copyformats, showing the following:

a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages,

connection type, impedance, and X/R ratios.d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor

material, insulation, and length.f. Busway ampacity and impedance.g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.

4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents andfrequent starting and stopping.

b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magneticinrush current, and overload capability.

c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time,type of start, and thermal-damage curve.

d. Generator thermal-damage curve.e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective

devices.f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility

company.g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical,

ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-timeadjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuitbreakers.

i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delayadjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, andcurrent transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, andinterrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical.

3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY

A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical atcircuit-breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculationshall be for a current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted shortcircuit at each of the following:

1. Switchgear and switchboard bus.2. Medium-voltage controller.3. Motor-control center.4. Distribution panelboard.5. Branch circuit panelboard.


Hope House


B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sourcesthroughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum faultconditions.

C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available faultcurrent.

D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall complywith IEEE 141, IEEE 241 and IEEE 242.

1. Transformers:

a. ANSI C57.12.10.b. ANSI C57.12.22.c. ANSI C57.12.40.d. IEEE C57.12.00.e. IEEE C57.96.

2. Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.010.3. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1.4. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.

E. Study Report:

1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) faultcurrents on electrical distribution system diagram.

2. Show interrupting (5-cycle) and time-delayed currents (6 cycles and above) onmedium- voltage breakers as needed to set relays and assess the sensitivity ofovercurrent relays.

F. Equipment Evaluation Report:

1. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings areequal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

2. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, applymultiplication factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted faultcurrents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and groundingelectrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuitwithstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetricalfault current.

3.4 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare awritten report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.

1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents.


Hope House


2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds)short-circuit currents.

3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.

B. Comply with IEEE 141, IEEE 241 and IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currentsand time intervals.

C. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:

a. Inrush current when first energized.b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current,

whichever is specified for that transformer.c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required

by unusual loading or emergency conditions.

2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for faultcurrents.

D. Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.

E. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according toICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242.Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a timeequivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time ofthe fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cablemanufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuitcurrent.

F. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results ofcoordination study:

1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:

a. Device tag.b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-

pickup values.c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and

instantaneous settings.d. Fuse-current rating and type.e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.


Hope House


2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protectivedevices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequatetime separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utilitycompany's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switchingschemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation.Show the following information:

a. Device tag.b. Voltage and current ratio for curves.c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer.d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.e. Cable damage curves.f. Transformer inrush points.g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.

G. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.

3.5 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584equations that are presented in NFPA70E-2004, Annex D.

B. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phaseovercurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination studymodel. Alternative methods shall be presented in the proposal.

C. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at allsignificant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear,motor-control centers, panelboards, busway and splitters) where work could beperformed on energized parts.

D. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include all MV, 575v, & 480v locations andsignificant locations in 240 volt and 208 volt systems fed from transformers equal to orgreater than 125 kVA.

E. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based upon thecalculated arc flash boundary considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.

F. The Arc Flash Hazard analysis shall include calculations for maximum and minimumcontributions of fault current magnitude. The minimum calculation shall assume thatthe utility contribution is at a minimum and shall assume a minimum motor load.Conversely, the maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from theutility and shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.

G. Arc flash computation shall include both line and load side of main breakercalculations, where necessary.

H. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearingtime. Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE 1584-2002section B.1.2.


Hope House


3.6 ARC FLASH REPORT SECTIONS

A. Incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations.

1. Arcing fault magnitude2. Device clearing time3. Duration of arc4. Arc flash boundary5. Working distance6. Incident energy7. Hazard Risk Category8. Recommendations for arc flash energy reduction

3.7 FIELD ADJUSTMENT

A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settingstable provided by the coordination study. Field adjustments to be completed by theengineering service division of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup andAcceptance Testing contract portion.

B. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish conformance withshort circuit and protective device coordination studies.

C. Notify Owner in writing of any required major equipment modifications.

D. Following completion of all studies, acceptance testing and startup by the fieldengineering service division of the equipment manufacturer, a 2-year warranty shall beprovided on all components manufactured by the engineering service parentmanufacturing company.

3.8 ARC FLASH WARNING LABELS

A. The vendor shall provide a 3.5 in. x 5 in. thermal transfer type label of high adhesionpolyester for each work location analyzed.

B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, “WARNING, ARC FLASHHAZARD”, and shall include the following information:

1. Location designation2. Nominal voltage3. Flash protection boundary4. Hazard risk category5. Incident energy6. Working distance7. Engineering report number, revision number and issue date8. Required PPE

C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field markings


Hope House


D. Arc flash labels shall be provided in the following manner and all labels shall be basedon recommended overcurrent device settings.

1. For each 600, 480 and applicable 208 volt panelboards and disconnects, one arcflash label shall be provided

2. For each motor control center, one arc flash label shall be provided3. For each low voltage switchboard, one arc flash label shall be provided4. For each switchgear, one flash label shall be provided5. For medium voltage switches one arc flash label shall be provided

E. Labels shall be field installed by the engineering service division of the equipmentmanufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.

3.9 ARC FLASH TRAINING

A. The equipment vendor shall train personnel of the potential arc flash hazardsassociated with working on energized equipment (minimum of 4 hours). Maintenanceprocedures in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70E, Standard For ElectricalSafety Requirements For Employee Workplaces, shall be provided in the equipmentmanuals. The training shall be certified for continuing education units (CEUs) by theInternational Association for Continuing Education Training (IACET).



Hope House

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - Page 1

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Time switches.2. Photoelectric switches.3. Indoor occupancy and switchbox-mounted vacancy sensors.4. Lighting Contractors.


1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, manual light switches.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



C. Operation and maintenance data

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES


1. Cooper Industries, Inc.2. Intermatic, Inc.3. Invensys Controls.4. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.5. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.6. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.

B. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display;complying with UL 917.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, andmarked for intended location and application.


Hope House


2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES


1. Cooper Industries, Inc.2. Intermatic, Inc.3. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.4. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.

B. Description: Solid state, with DPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA, to operateconnected load, complying with UL 773.


2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on andturn-off levels within that range.

3. Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation.4. Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type.5. Mounting: Twist lock complying with NEMA C136.10, with base.

2.3 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED VACANCY SENSORS


1. Watt Stopper.2. Cooper Industries, Inc.3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.4. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.5. Lightolier Controls.6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.9. RAB Lighting.10. Sensor Switch, Inc.11. Square D.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch vacancy sensor, suitablefor mounting in a single gang switchbox.


2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F.3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent

at 277 V, and 800-W incandescent.


Hope House


C. Wall-Switch Sensor:

1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40degrees; with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.

2. Sensing Technology: PIR.3. Switch Type: SP.4. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage; passive-infrared type.5. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.6. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage

patterns of the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.7. “Manual on” mode for vacancy sensing.

2.4 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Watt Stopper2. Cooper Industries, Inc.3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.4. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indooroccupancy sensors with a separate power pack.


2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area isoccupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lightsoff, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying withUL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack.

4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

5. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard

electrical enclosure.c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind

hinged door.

6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing andnormal operation of sensor.

7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.


Hope House


C. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through patternchanges of reflected ultrasonic energy.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not lessthan 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximatespeed of 12 inches.

2. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within acircular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circulararea of 2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.

4. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet whenmounted on a 10-foot-high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet.

D. Dual-Technology Digital Vacancy Sensor: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants incoverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technologyor combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field byoperating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any

portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., anddetect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches ineither a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within acircular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.

E. Digital on/off room controller: Integrates digital vacancy and low voltage manualcontrols for automatic on/off control of multi-level lighting.

1. Mounts to standard junction box through ½” knockout.2. 120/277 VAC input from local lighting circuit.3. Connects to associated control devices with RJ45 connectors.4. Manual-on mode for vacancy sensing. Accepts signal from momentary low-

voltage wall switch.

F. Low-voltage digital wall switches; momentary push-button switches for manual controlof digital vacancy sensors.

1. Provide quantity and configuration of buttons as required.2. Control vacancy sensor through room controller.

2.5 LIGHTING CONTACTORS


1. Square D.2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP.


Hope House


3. Eaton Corporation.4. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & amp; Industrial - Electrical

Distribution; Total Lighting Control.5. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.


A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller thanNo. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage ElectricalPower Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductorsnot smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors notsmaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage ofareas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's writteninstructions.

B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of SubstantialCompletion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupiedconditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancyhours for this purpose.

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detectorrange. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.

C. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminatestructure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.

D. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical PowerConductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 3/4 inch.

E. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553"Identification for Electrical Systems."


Hope House




1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electricalcircuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioningcontrols and equipment.

B. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests andinspections.




Hope House

PANELBOARDS 262416 - Page 1

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuitpanelboards.

B. Related Requirements

1. Section 260573 “Over-current protective device coordination/Arc Flash Analysis”.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulationsof installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards.


D. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.

E. Operation and maintenance data.



B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.



Hope House


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.c. Kitchen, Wash-Down, Pool Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts,match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Directory Card: Type-written. inside panelboard door, mounted in transparentcard holder.

B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type.4. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material.

Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor

material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboardswith one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessaryappurtenances required for future installation of devices.

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.


Hope House


2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A andSmaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS



B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable withoutdisturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.


Hope House


2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES



B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacityto meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-leveloverloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustablemagnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug orfield-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-throughratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699;120/240-V, single-pole configuration.

8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and

conductor materials.c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit withadjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, andground-fault indicator.

e. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breakerhandle in on or off position.


Hope House


C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockablehandle.

1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified inSection 262813 "Fuses."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according toNEMA PB 1.1.

B. Mount panel so that the operating handle of the top-most switch or circuit breaker, inon position, is not higher than 79 inches above finished floor or grade.

C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessedpanelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

G. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; providewarning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's finalroom designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter tocreate directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying withrequirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for ElectricalSystems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards witha nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553"Identification for Electrical Systems."


Hope House



A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative toinspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized servicerepresentative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations,including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connectingsupply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

E. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated inNETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with testparameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstratecompliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not morethan 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of eachpanelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections areaccessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infraredscan of each panelboard 11 months after date of SubstantialCompletion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measuretemperature or to detect significant deviations from normalvalues. Provide calibration record for device.

F. Equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection report, including a certified report that identifiespanelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation ofdeficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.



Hope House

ELECTRICITY METERING 262713 - Page 1

SECTION 262713 - ELECTRICITY METERING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes equipment for electricity metering by utility company.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts and wiringdiagrams.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY UTILITY COMPANY

A. Meters will be furnished by utility company.

B. Current-Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical-power utilitycompany.

C. Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical-power utility company.

D. Meter Sockets: Steady-state and short-circuit current ratings shall meet indicatedcircuit ratings.


Hope House


E. Modular Meter Center: Factory-coordinated assembly of a main service terminal boxwith lugs only, wireways, tenant meter socket modules, and tenant feeder circuitbreakers arranged in adjacent vertical sections. Assembly shall be complete withinterconnecting buses and other features as specified below.


a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical

Distribution.c. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Comply with requirements of utility company for meter center.3. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.4. Minimum Short-Circuit Rating: 100,000A symmetrical at rated voltage.5. Tenant Feeder Circuit Breakers: Series-combination-rated molded-case units,

rated to protect circuit breakers in downstream tenant and to house loadcentersand panelboards that have 42,000-A interrupting capacity.

a. Identification: Complying with requirements in Section 260553"Identification for Electrical Systems" with permanent label identifyingtenant's address.

b. Physical Protection: Tamper resistant, with hasp for padlock.

6. Meter Socket: Rating coordinated with indicated tenant feeder circuit rating.7. Surge Protection: For main disconnect device, comply with requirements in

Section 264313 "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with equipment installation requirements in NECA 1.

B. Install meters furnished by utility company. Install raceways and equipment accordingto utility company's written requirements. Provide empty conduits for metering leadsand extend grounding connections as required by utility company.

C. Install modular meter center according to NECA 400 switchboard installationrequirements.

D. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identificationfor Electrical Systems."

1. Series Combination Warning Label: Self-adhesive type, with text as required byNFPA 70.


Hope House


2. Equipment Identification Labels: Adhesive film labels with clear protectiveoverlay. For residential meters, provide an additional card holder suitable fortypewritten card with occupant's name.



Hope House

WIRING DEVICES 262726 - Page 1

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.2. Weather-resistant receptacles.3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used forpremarking wall plates.


D. Operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the followingmanufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate fromsingle source from single manufacturer.


Hope House


2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location andapplication.


2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, tamper-resistant 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that maybe incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper; TRCR 5362(duplex).b. Hubbell; HBL 5352TR(duplex).c. Leviton; T 5352(duplex).d. Pass & Seymour; 5362 TR (duplex).

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type.2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-

596.3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no

longer provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; TRVGF20.b. Hubbell; GFTR 5352 L.c. Pass & Seymour; 2095 TR.d. Leviton; TR7590.

C. Tamper-resistant and weather resistant GFCI Receptables.


a. Cooper; TWRVGF20.b. Hubbell; GFTR 20 U.


Hope House


c. Pass & Seymour; 2095TRWR.d. Leviton; WR7590.

2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Single Pole:

b. Cooper; AH1221.c. Hubbell; HBL1221.d. Leviton; 1221-2.e. Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.

f. Two Pole:

g. Cooper; AH1222.h. Hubbell; HBL1222.i. Leviton; 1222-2.j. Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC2.

k. Three Way:

l. Cooper; AH1223.m. Hubbell; HBL1223.n. Leviton; 1223-2.o. Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3.

p. Four Way:

q. Cooper; AH1224.r. Hubbell; HBL1224.s. Leviton; 1224-2.t. Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC4.

C. Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A:


a. Cooper; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V.b. Hubbell; HBL1201PL for 120 and 277 V.c. Leviton; 1221-LH1.d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1RPL7 for 277 V.


Hope House


2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is"off."

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; AH1221L.b. Hubbell; HBL1221L.c. Leviton; 1221-2L.d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

2.6 WALL-BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-offswitches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole switching. Comply withUL 1472.

C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve.On-off switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.

1. 2000 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices.

D. LED Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimming drivers; trim potentiometerto adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimmingwith low end not greater than 10 percent of full brightness.

2.7 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and

listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof while-in-use Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying withType 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.


Hope House


2.8 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architectunless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unlessotherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials overdevice boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by ridingagainst outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement,concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the racewaysystem, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not crossa joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced orterminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for thepurpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from strandedwire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions ofNFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign

matter.c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large

enough.


Hope House


D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and thatwere installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time toconnect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, untilthe last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inchesinlength.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrapsolid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way aroundterminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required bymanufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits,splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to

hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontallymounted receptacles to the left.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes andremount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover roughwall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimensionvertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switchesunder single, multigang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstreamreceptacles is not required.


Hope House




1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is

unacceptable.3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely

mounted.6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the

circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defectivedevices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioningunits and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.




Hope House

FUSES 262813 - Page 1

SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits,enclosed switches, enclosed controllers and motor-control centers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Operation and maintenance data.



B. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.


1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximumfuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.2. Edison Fuse, Inc.3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.4. Littelfuse, Inc.


Hope House

FUSES 262813 - Page 2

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratingsconsistent with circuit voltages.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.

B. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.

C. Control Circuits: Class CC, time delay.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable withoutremoving fuse.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information oninside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block and holder.



Hope House

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - Page 1

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches.2. Nonfusible switches.3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).4. Enclosures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, andcomponent indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations,sections, details, and attachments to other work.








Hope House


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES



B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 andNEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate required fuses,lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover inclosed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminumground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded andbonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses arespecified.

4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES



B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 andNEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept threepadlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminumground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded andbonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.


Hope House


2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS



B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, withinterrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-leveloverloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustablemagnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with thefollowing field-adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip.2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

E. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-throughratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

F. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.2. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensitydischarge lighting circuits.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickupand time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt tripunit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

5. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contactsmimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breakercontacts.

6. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when circuit breaker hastripped.


Hope House


2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, andUL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.3. Kitchen, Wash-Down, Pool Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform heightunless otherwise indicated.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and bracketsand temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker,component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.


Hope House


C. Tests and Inspections:


2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstratecompliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not passtests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosedswitches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation ofdeficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.



Hope House

ENGINE GENERATORS 263213 - Page 1

SECTION 263213 – ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency and standby power supply with the following features:

1. Gas engine. 2. Unit-mounted cooling system. 3. Unit-mounted control and monitoring. 4. Outdoor Enclosure

B. See Section 263600 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator and accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

C. Dimensions and layouts of all required concrete foundations/housekeeping pads.

D. Source quality-control test reports.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

G. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.


Hope House


D. Comply with ASME B15.1.

E. Comply with NFPA 37.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

G. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.

H. Comply with UL 2200.

I. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements. Generator set shall be EPA certified and shall meet all EPA regulations including the Reciprocal Internal Combustion Engine (RICE) regulations of 40CFR 63 subpart ZZZZ.

J. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirement for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation.


A. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:

1. Ambient Temperature: 5 to 40 deg C. 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Kohler Co.


Hope House


2. Onan/Cummins Power Generation 3. Generac Power Systems, Inc. 4. Caterpillar; Engine Div. 5. MTU Onsite Energy

2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET

A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set, UL2200 listed.

B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments.

C. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Power Output Ratings: 60KW/75KVA, stand-by rated, 208Y/120V. 2. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire. 3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name

and address, and model and serial number of component. 4. Alternator: Shall be capable of accepting a minimum motor starting load of

275KVA (480V) in a single step at a maximum of 35% instantaneous voltage dip

D. Generator-Set Performance:

1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load.

2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.

3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load.

4. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.

5. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within five seconds.

6. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.

7. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator system components.

8. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.

2.3 ENGINE

A. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2 (Diesel Fuel).


Hope House


1. Not to exceed design value of 12.2 gph fuel consumption at full load 2. Maximum return line restriction, 5.9 in. Hg.

B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.

C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm.

D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:

1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow.

2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.

3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.

E. Diesel Fuel-oil System:

1. Comply with NFPA 30 2. Piping: Fuel-oil piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel: Cast iron, aluminum,

copper, and galvanizing shall not be used in the fuel-oil system. 3. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine to provide primary fuel flow under starting

and load conditions. 4. Fuel Filtering Remove water and contaminants larger than 1 micron. 5. Relief Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns

excess fuel to source. 6. Subbase-Mounted, 24 hour, Double-Wall, Fuel-Oil Tank: Factory installed and

piped, complying with UL 142 fuel-oil tank. Features include the following:

a. Tank level indicator b. Fuel-Tank Capacity: Minimum 133 percent of total fuel required for

periodic maintenance operations between fuel refills, plus fuel for the hours of continuous operation for indicated EPSS class.

c. Leak detection in interstitial space. d. Vandal-resistant fill cap. e. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. f. Dimension - Fuel tank dimensions shall not exceed the generator footprint

plus 6”. g. Fuel tank high level shutdown or fuel supply alarm.

F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.

G. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.

H. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.


Hope House


1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.

2. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer.

I. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements.

1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz. 2. Sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet from exhaust discharge after

installation is complete shall be 85 dBA or less. 3. Muffler mounted within outdoor generator set enclosure.

J. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator.

K. Starting System: 12-V electric, with negative ground.

1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.

2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding.

3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1

"Project Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least twice without recharging.

5. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.

a. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236.

2.4 CONTROL AND MONITORING

A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms.

B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration.


Hope House


C. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system, and the following:

1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 7. Running-time meter. 8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es). 9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. 10. Generator overload. 11. Main fuel tank low-level alarm.

a. Low-fuel level alarm shall be initiated when the level fall below that required for operation for the duration required in “Fuel Tank Capacity” paragraph in “Diesel Fuel-Oil System” Article.

D. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 systems. Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel.

1. Overcrank shutdown. 2. Coolant low-temperature alarm. 3. Control switch not in auto position. 4. Battery-charger malfunction alarm. 5. Battery low-voltage alarm. 6. Fuel tank derangement alarm 7. Fuel tank high shutdown or fuel supply alarm

F. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush-mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated.

G. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled. Push button shall be protected from accidental operation

2.5 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, LSI Electronic Trip type; 100 percent rated; complying with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.

1. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection.


Hope House


2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other

protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel. 5. Life-safety and standby overcurrent protection must be coordinated with

downstream projective devices in accordance with NEC Articles 700 and 701. Coordinate with requirements of Specification Section 260573 “Over-Current protective device coordination Arc-Flash Analysis.”

2.6 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.

B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.

C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.

D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required.

E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.

F. Enclosure: Dripproof.

G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.

H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.

1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output-voltage operating band.

I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew point.

J. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.

K. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum.

2.7 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES

A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:



Hope House


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Isolation. h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading over pad area.

3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment. 4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties. 5. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers. 6. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.

B. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, Steel, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint in Two-Part Telescoping Housing.


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation.

c. Isolation Technology, Inc.

d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

e. Mason Industries, Inc.

f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

g. Vibration Isolation.

h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.

a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.

3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.


Hope House


2.8 FINISHES

A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.

2.9 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE

A. Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof aluminum housing, Level 2 sound attenuated, wind resistant up to 100 mph. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within enclosure.

B. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions.

1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable louvers prevent entry of rain and snow.

2. Automatic Dampers: At engine cooling-air inlet and discharge. Dampers shall be closed to reduce enclosure heat loss in cold weather when unit is not operating.

C. Generator Muffler Location: Muffler shall be mounted within enclosure.

D. Noise Levels: Sound Attenuating Enclosure shall provide for sound level measured at any point a distance of 23 feet from enclosure to be a maximum of 70dBA or less


A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set at rated power factor using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.

1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115. 2. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.

2.11 TEMPORARY LOAD BANK

A. Provide Temporary Load Bank to test installation as required in Part 3 - “Execution.”

B. Description: Load bank shall be resistive unit capable of providing a balanced 3-phase, delta-connected load to generator set at 100 percent rated-system capacity, at 80 percent power factor, lagging. Unit may be composed of separate resistive and reactive load banks controlled by a common control panel. Unit shall be capable of selective control of load in 25 percent steps and with minimum step changes of approximately 5 and 10 percent available.


Hope House


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine-generator installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.

B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.

C. Install packaged engine generator on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete” or Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in this section.

D. Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine muffler. Install thimble at wall. Piping shall be same diameter as muffler outlet. Flexible connectors and steel piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping.”

1. Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain connection with a shutoff valve, stainless-steel flexible connector, and Schedule 40, black steel pipe with welded joints. Flexible connectors and piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping."

E. Install exhaust system to manufacturers’ recommendations. Slope exhaust piping away from the engine outlet and install a water trap with drain at the lowest point.

1. Install water condensate drain at the outlet of the silences 2. Arrange exhaust outlets to keep water out of the piping system.

F. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.

G. Coordinate piping installations and specialty arrangements with schematics on Drawings and with requirements specified in piping systems. If Drawings are explicit enough, these requirements may be reduced or omitted.


Hope House


H. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

I. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance.

J. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.

K. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

L. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

M. Identify system components according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" and Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.



1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform 2 hour operational test and 100% full load (load bank) test required by NFPA 110 as outlined in paragraph 7.13, installation acceptance in NFPA 110. These tests are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test, cold start conditions, and normal building operating loads.

3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.

a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions.

b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery.

c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge.

d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.

4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging conditions.


Hope House


5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

6. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40-inch wg. Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the engine.

7. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. 8. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to

measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.

9. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits.

10. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four locations on the property line, and compare measured levels with required values.

11. Safety/Emergency Shutdown Test.

C. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.

D. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

E. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

F. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

G. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for examination on request

H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.

J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

K. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus connection. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are accessible to portable scanner.


Hope House


1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations and connections checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."



Hope House

TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - Page 1

SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes automatic transfer switches rated 600 V and less.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnishedspecialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showingminimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features anddevices, and material lists for each switch specified.





B. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.


D. Comply with NFPA 110.

E. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.


Hope House


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Transfer Switches:


a. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.b. Caterpillar; Engine Div.c. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP.d. Generac Power Systems, Inc.e. GE Zenith Controls.f. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading andtotal system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percentof switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed byprotective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditionsindicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.

1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switchand trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installationlocation.

C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.

D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceedvoltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according toIEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test ofNEMA ICS 1.

E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid orelectric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in bothdirections.


Hope House


F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-ratedcurrent between active power sources.

1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case circuit-breaker components are not acceptable.

2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching.

Conventional automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall haveseparate arcing contacts.

G. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Battery Charger: For generator starting batteries.

1. Float type rated 10 A.2. Ammeter to display charging current.3. Fused ac inputs and dc outputs.

I. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 andUL 508, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediateposition stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contactsoperates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30seconds.

D. Emergency power contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contactsoperates when switch is operating on emergency power source.

E. Programmed Neutral Switch Position: Switch operator has a programmed neutralposition arranged to provide a midpoint between the two working switch positions, withan intentional, time-controlled pause at midpoint during transfer.

F. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:

1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percentof pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delaytransfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, andfactory set for one second.


Hope House


3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator.Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factoryset for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes,and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage orsustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has beenrestored.

5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch

normal- and emergency-source sensing circuits.

a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "NormalSource Available."

b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved"Emergency Source Available."

8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throwcontacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.

9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatictransfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless ofcondition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.

10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolatedand normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes,and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remoteengine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

12. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch startsengine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time,then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiatesexercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periodsare adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercisecycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-minute cool-down period. Exerciserfeatures include the following:

a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with andwithout load transfer.

b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not

available.

G. Load Shed: Automatic transfer switch shall be provided with Load Shed feature.

1. Load is shed from emergency power source by driving the transfer switch to theneutral position when remote signal contacts close (e.g. Genset overloadwarning signal from Genset control panel or other device). The load istransferred to the emergency source when the signal contacts open.

2. Retransfer is immediate when the preferred source is re-established.


Hope House



A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment.Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delaysettings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength testcomplying with NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Identify components according to Section 260553 "Identification for ElectricalSystems."

B. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for ElectricalSystems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductorsand Cables."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative totest and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, includingconnections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorizedservice representative:

1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, testfor compliance with requirements.


3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground withinsulation-resistance tester. Use test voltages and procedure recommended bymanufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and

integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.d. Perform manual transfer operation.


Hope House


4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operationalfunction for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switchesand of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.c. Verify time-delay settings.d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings.e. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting,

transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power,and engine cool-down and shutdown.

C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings andmeasured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag toeach tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

G. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after FinalAcceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels sojoints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan ofeach switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperatureor to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration recordfor device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switcheschecked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficienciesdetected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenancepersonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment asspecified below. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.



Hope House

LIGHTING 265100 - Page 1

SECTION 265100 - LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.2. LED Lighting fixtures and components.3. Exit signs.4. Lighting fixture supports.


1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting,including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipolelighting relays and contactors.

2. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicatedimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, andaccessories. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.


D. Fluorescent lamp and ballast data to demonstrate conformance with design criterialisted on drawings.

E. LED Lighting fixtures - provide “Lighting Facts” Information sheets.





Hope House


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may beincorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated onDrawings.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessedfixtures.

B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according toNEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support toprevent warping and sagging.

E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakageunder operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools.Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components fromfalling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

F. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance toyellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:

1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11.2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served.3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-

level control is indicated.4. Sound Rating: Class A5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.


Hope House


6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A orbetter.

7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher.8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.9. BF: 0.88 or higher.10. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.11. Comply with requirements listed in lighting fixture schedule on Drawings.

B. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.

C. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor,Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection.

1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.

D. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F startingand operating temperature with indicated lamp types.

E. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens.2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal.3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control

system and lamp type indicated.4. Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the

ballast, controller, and connecting wiring are compatible.

2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and withANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall bedesigned for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.3. Sound Rating: Class A.4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or

better.6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated.9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.


Hope House


2.5 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility,luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.2. 5 watts maximum power consumption per face.

2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. T8 programmed-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and averagerated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

B. T8 programmed-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and averagerated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500K,average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start, and suitable foruse with dimming ballasts where required unless otherwise indicated.

1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).

2.7 LED LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. LED: Color temperature - per Drawings, CRI 80 (minimum) tested in accordance withLM-80, TM21. Projected life of over 75,000 hours at 50º C.

B. Drivers: Constant current driver at 350 mA, 100-277V.

2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" forchannel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy.Finish same as fixture.


Hope House


C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount asingle fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealedstainless steel, 12 gage.

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equippedwith threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps ineach fixture.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports.

C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod

for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

D. Air-Handling Lighting Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.

E. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.

F. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductorsand Cables."


A. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicatingand interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest todemonstrate compliance with standards.



Hope House

INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 275123.31 – Page 1

SECTION 275123.31 - INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Manually switched intercommunications and program systems withthe following components:

1. Master Monitor Stations.2. Audio-Only Tenant Stations.3. Conductors and cables.4. Raceways.



B. Shop Drawings: For intercommunications and program systems. Include plans,elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, requiredclearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of eachfield connection.

2. Include scaled drawings for master station that detail built-in equipment.3. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

a. Identify terminals to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance.b. Single-line diagram showing interconnection of components.c. Cabling diagram showing cable routing.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, accesspanels, and special moldings are shown and coordinated with each other, using inputfrom Installers of the items involved.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.



Hope House



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For intercommunications and program systems toinclude in operation and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified inSection 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. A record of Owner's equipment-programming option decisions.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained andapproved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location andapplication.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Aiphone Corporation.2. Mircom Inc.3. BEC Inegrated Solutions.4. TekTone Communications

2.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS

A. The system shall be hard wired and constructed with a 2-line bus communicationsystem. The system is designed with communication trunk lines that use a distributionpoint from a bus control unit. System shall be ADA compliant. Systems with audio onlycomponents shall be configurable.

B. Functional Components:

1. Entrance stations.2. Tenant stations.3. Access control system.

C. System Requirement: Unless noted otherwise on drawings provide system size asfollows.

1. Entrance stations:2. Tenant stations (master):


Hope House


D. Operation:

1. Calling Tenant Station from Master Entry Station and Communicating.2. Activating Door Release from Tenant Station.

2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. Coordinate features and select components to form an integrated system. Matchcomponents and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.

B. Equipment: Modular type using solid-state components, fully rated for continuous dutyunless otherwise indicated. Select equipment for normal operation on input powerusually supplied at 110 to 130 V, 60 Hz.

C. Weather-Resistant Equipment: Listed and labeled by an NRTL for duty outdoors or indamp locations.

2.4 MULTI-TENANT ENTRY SYSTEM

A. Master Entrance Station:

1. Entrance Panel: Basis of design is Aiphone Model GTA-DES. Provide modularunits with the following functional modules, corresponding panels, hardware andfittings.

a. Hands-free audio communication.b. 10-key keypad.c. Direct-digit dialing, and alphabetical scrollingd. 160 character digital displaye. Capability to store up to 500 tenant names/room numbers.f. Semi-flush mount with backbox and die-cast weather and vandal-resistant

construction.

B. Tenant station: Basis of design is Aiphone Model GT-1A.

1. Hands-free control/audio communications.2. Talk with visitors.3. Unlock doors.4. Individual doorbell chime within apartment, with ability to support an external

strobe for hearing-impaired units.5. ABS plastic construction, surface mounted to single gang back-box.

C. External Signaling for Hearing-Impaired Units – Provide all required components totrigger an external chime/strobe for hearing-impaired residents where indicated ondrawings. Components to include but are not limited to:1. External signaling relay (Aiphone GTS-RY or equal).2. 24VDC power supply.3. External 24VDC chime with visual strobe.4. 24VDC timer relay.


Hope House



A. Conductors: Jacketed, twisted pair and twisted multi-pair, untinned solid copper. Sizesas recommended by system manufacturer, but no smaller than No. 20 AWG.

B. Insulation: Thermoplastic, not less than 1/32 inch thick.

C. Shielding: For speaker-microphone leads and elsewhere where recommended bymanufacturer; No. 34 AWG, tinned, soft-copper strands formed into a braid orequivalent foil.

1. Minimum Shielding Coverage on Conductors: 60 percent.

D. Plenum Cable: Listed and labeled for plenum installation.

2.6 RACEWAYS

A. Intercommunication and Program System Raceways and Boxes: Same as required forelectrical branch circuits specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes forElectrical Systems."

B. Outlet boxes shall be not less than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inchesdeep.

C. Flexible metal conduit is prohibited.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles,cabinets, desks, and counters, and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsumboard partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal raceway andcables except in unfinished spaces.

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533

"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floorswhere possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with noexcess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide anduse lacing bars and distribution spools.


Hope House


3.2 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for ElectricSystems" for installation of conduits and wireways.

B. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. General Requirements:

1. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Maketerminations only at outlets and terminals.

2. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips injunction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.Cables may not be spliced.

3. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not morethan 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

4. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceedingmanufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distributionspools.

5. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splicecable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable ifdamaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

6. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling.Heat lamps shall not be used.

C. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunicationspaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend speaker cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inchesabove ceiling by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or be in contact with pipes,ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

D. Separation of Wires: Separate speaker-microphone, line-level, speaker-level, andpower wiring runs. Install in separate raceways or, where exposed or in sameenclosure, separate conductors at least 12 inches apart for speaker microphones andadjacent parallel power and telephone wiring. Separate other intercommunicationequipment conductors as recommended by equipment manufacturer.


Hope House


3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Providematching networks where required.

B. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire andcable marking tape to designate wires and cables so they identify media incoordination with system wiring diagrams.

C. Weatherproof Equipment: For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, orwhere exposed to weather, install consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating.

D. Speaker-Line Matching Transformer Connections: Make initial connections using tapsettings indicated on Drawings.

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low Voltage Electric Power Conductorsand Cables."

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize groundloops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power systemand equipment grounding.

C. Install grounding electrodes as specified in Section 270526 "Grounding and Bondingfor Communications Systems."

3.6 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING

A. Programming: Fully brief Owner on available programming options. Record Owner'sdecisions and set up initial system program. Prepare a written record of decisions,implementation methodology, and final results.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests andinspections.


1. Schedule tests with at least seven days' advance notice of test performance.2. After installing intercommunications and program systems and after electrical

circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.3. Operational Test: Test originating station-to-station messages at each

intercommunication station. Verify proper routing and volume levels and thatsystem is free of noise and distortion. Test each available message path fromeach station on system.


Hope House


C. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wiresand terminals are identified. Prepare a list of final tap settings of paging speaker-linematching transformers.

D. Intercommunications and program systems will be considered defective if they do notpass tests and inspections.


3.8 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service and initial system programming.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal andinstallation requirements.

2. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's writteninstructions.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. On-Site Assistance: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting transformer taps, and adjustingcontrols to meet occupancy conditions.

B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of SubstantialCompletion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupiedconditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancyhours for this purpose.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain theintercommunications and program systems.

1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on programming equipment for starting upand shutting down, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining the system andequipment.



Hope House

SECURITY ACCESS 281300 - Page 1

SECTION 281300 - SECURITY ACCESS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Security access central-control station.2. One or more security access networked workstations.3. Security access operating system and application software.4. Security access controllers connected to high-speed electronic-data transmission

network.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCTV: Closed-circuit television.

B. CPU: Central processing unit.

C. Credential: Data assigned to an entity and used to identify that entity.

D. dpi: Dots per inch.

E. DTS: Digital Termination Service. A microwave-based, line-of-sight communicationprovided directly to the end user.

F. GFI: Ground fault interrupter.

G. Identifier: A credential card; keypad personal identification number; or code, biometriccharacteristic, or other unique identification entered as data into the entry-controldatabase for the purpose of identifying an individual. Where this term is presented withan initial capital letter, this definition applies.

H. I/O: Input/Output.

I. LAN: Local area network.

J. Location: A Location on the network having a PC-to-controller communications link,with additional controllers at the Location connected to the PC-to-controller link with aTIA 485-A communications loop. Where this term is presented with an initial capitalletter, this definition applies.


Hope House


K. PC: Personal computer. Applies to the central station, workstations, and file servers.

L. PCI Bus: Peripheral Component Interconnect. A peripheral bus providing a high-speeddata path between the CPU and the peripheral devices such as a monitor, disk drive,or network.

M. PDF: Portable Document Format. The file format used by the Acrobat document-exchange-system software from Adobe.

N. RAS: Remote access services.

O. RF: Radio frequency.

P. ROM: Read-only memory. ROM data are maintained through losses of power.

Q. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into MicrosoftWindows.

R. TWAIN: Technology without an Interesting Name. A programming interface that lets agraphics application, such as an image editing program or desktop publishing program,activate a scanner, frame grabber, or other image-capturing device.

S. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

T. USB: Universal serial bus.

U. WAN: Wide area network.

V. WAV: The digital audio format used in Microsoft Windows.

W. WMP: Windows media player.

X. Wiegand: Patented magnetic principle that uses specially treated wires embedded inthe credential card.

Y. Windows: Operating system by Microsoft Corporation.

Z. Workstation: A PC with software that is configured for specific, limited security-systemfunctions.

AA. WYSIWYG: What You See Is What You Get. Text and graphics appear on the screenthe same as they will in print.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operatingcharacteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Reference each product toa location on Drawings. Test and evaluation data presented in Product Data shallcomply with SIA BIO-01.


Hope House


B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to otherwork.

1. Diagrams for cable management system.2. Wiring Diagrams. For power, signal, and control wiring. Show typical wiring

schematics including the following:

a. Workstation outlets, jacks, and jack assemblies.b. Patch cords.c. Patch panels.

3. Cable Administration Drawings: As specified in "Identification" Article.4. Battery and charger calculations for central station, workstations, and controllers.

C. Product Data: For all Equipment, Enclosures, Devices, workstation outlets, jacks,faceplates, jack assemblies, wiring, and connectors/terminations.

D. Other Action Submittals:

1. Project planning documents as specified in Part 3.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For security system to include in emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Microsoft Windows software documentation.2. PC installation and operating documentation, manuals, and software for the PC

and all installed peripherals. Software shall include system restore, emergencyboot diskettes, and drivers for all installed hardware. Provide separately for eachPC.

3. Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating specifications,design guides, user's guides for software and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard-copy submittal.

4. System installation and setup guides with data forms to plan and record optionsand setup decisions.


Hope House




1. Credential card blanks, ready for printing. Include enough credential cards for allpersonnel to be enrolled at the site plus an extra 50 percent for future use.

2. Fuses of all kinds, power and electronic, equal to 10 percent of amount installedfor each size used, but no fewer than three units.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain central station, workstations, controllers, Identifier readers,and all software through one source from single manufacturer.


D. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."

E. Comply with SIA DC-01 and SIA DC-03.


A. Central Station, Workstations, and Controllers:

1. Store in temperature- and humidity-controlled environment in originalmanufacturer's sealed containers. Maintain ambient temperature between 50 and85 deg F (10 and 30 deg C), and not more than 80 percent relative humidity,noncondensing.

2. Open each container; verify contents against packing list; and file copy ofpacking list, complete with container identification, for inclusion in operation andmaintenance data.

3. Mark packing list with the same designations assigned to materials andequipment for recording in the system labeling schedules that are generated bysoftware specified in "Cable and Asset Management Software" Article.

4. Save original manufacturer's containers and packing materials and deliver asdirected under provisions covering extra materials.


Hope House



A. Environmental Conditions: System shall be capable of withstanding the followingenvironmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation ofoperating capability:

1. Control Station: Rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of 60 to 85deg F (16 to 30 deg C) and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent,noncondensing.

2. Indoor, Controlled Environment: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. Systemcomponents, except the central-station control unit, installed in temperature-controlled indoor environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambientconditions of 36 to 122 deg F (2 to 50 deg C) dry bulb and 20 to 90 percentrelative humidity, noncondensing.

3. Indoor, Uncontrolled Environment: NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosures. Systemcomponents installed in non-temperature-controlled indoor environments shall berated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of 0 to 122 deg F (minus 18to plus 50 deg C) dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity,noncondensing.

4. Outdoor Environment: NEMA 250, NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosures. Systemcomponents installed in locations exposed to weather shall be rated forcontinuous operation in ambient conditions of minus 30 to plus 122 deg F (minus34 to plus 50 deg C) dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, condensing.Rate for continuous operation where exposed to rain as specified in NEMA 250,winds up to 85 mph and snow cover up to 24 inches thick.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide SonitrolSecurity S2 Access Control System or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Bosch Security Systems, Inc.2. Honeywell International Inc; Honeywell Access Systems.3. TAC; Andover Continuum Brand.4. HID Global

2.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Security Access System: PC-based central station and field-installed controllers,connected by a high-speed electronic-data transmission network.

B. System Software: Based on 32-bit, Windows central-station, workstation operatingsystem, server operating system, and application software. Software shall have thefollowing capabilities:

1. Multiuser and multitasking to allow for independent activities and monitoring tooccur simultaneously at different workstations.


Hope House


2. Graphical user interface to show pull-down menus and a menu-tree format thatcomplies with interface guidelines of Microsoft Windows.

3. System license for the entire system including capability for future additions thatare within the indicated system size limits specified in this Section.

4. Open-architecture system that allows importing and exporting of data andinterfacing with other systems that are compatible with Microsoft Windows.

5. Password-protected operator login and access.6. Open-database-connectivity compliant.

C. Network connecting the central station and workstations shall be a LAN using MicrosoftWindows-based TCP/IP with a capacity of connecting up to 99 workstations. Systemshall be portable across multiple communication platforms without changing systemsoftware.

2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION AND DATABASE

A. Database and database management software shall define and modify each point indatabase using operator commands. Definition shall include parameters andconstraints associated with each system device.

B. Database Operations:

1. System data management shall be in a hierarchical menu-tree format, withnavigation through expandable menu branches and manipulated with use ofmenus and icons in a main menu and system toolbar

C. Access Card/Code Operation and Management: Access Authorization shall be by card,by a manually entered code (PIN), or by a combination of both (card plus PIN).

1. Access authorization shall verify the facility code first, the card or card-and-PINvalidation second, and the access level (Time of Day, day of week, date), anti-passback status, and the number of uses last.

2. Use data-entry windows to view, edit and issue access levels. Access-authorization entry-management system shall maintain and coordinate all accesslevels to prevent duplication or the incorrect creation of levels.

3. Allow assignment of multiple cards/codes to a cardholder.4. Allow assignment of up to four access levels for each location to a cardholder.

Each access level may contain any combination of doors.5. Each door may be assigned four time zones.6. Access codes may be up to 11 digits in length.7. Software shall allow the grouping of locations so cardholder data can be shared

by all locations in the group.8. Visitor access: Issue a visitor badge for data tracking or photo ID purposes

without assigning that person a card or code.9. Cardholder Tracing: Allow for selection of cardholder for tracing: Make a special

audible and visible annunciation at control station when a selected card or codeis used at a designated reader. Annunciation shall include automatic display ofcardholder image.

10. Allow each cardholder to be given either an unlimited number of uses or anumber from one to 9999 that regulates the number of times the card can beused before it is automatically deactivated.


Hope House


11. Provide for cards and codes to be activated and deactivated manually orautomatically by date. Provide for multiple deactivate dates to bepreprogrammed.

D. Group:

1. Group names may be used to sort cardholders into groups that allow theoperator to determine the tenant, vendor, contractor, department, division, or anyother designation of a group to which the person belongs.

2. System software shall have the capacity to assign one of 32,000 group names toan access authorization.

3. Make provision in software to deactivate and reactivate all access authorizationsassigned to a particular group.

4. Allow sorting of history reports and code list printouts by group name.

E. Access Levels:

1. System shall allow for the creation of up to 32,000 access levels.2. One level shall be predefined as the Master Access Level. The Master Access

Level shall work at all doors at all times and override any anti-passback.3. System shall allow for access to be restricted to any area by reader and by time.

Access levels shall determine when and where an Identifier is authorized.4. System shall be able to create multiple door and time-zone combinations under

the same access level so that an Identifier may be valid during different timeperiods at different readers even if the readers are on the same controller.

F. User-Defined Fields:

1. System shall provide a minimum of 99 user-defined fields, each with up to 50characters, for specific information about each credential holder.

2. System shall accommodate a title for each field; field length shall be 20characters.

3. A "Required" option may be applied to each user-defined field that, whenselected, forces the operator to enter data in the user-defined field before thecredential can be saved.

4. A "Unique" option may be applied to each user-defined field that, when selected,will not allow duplicate data from different credential holders to be entered.

5. Data format option may be assigned to each user-defined field that will requirethe data to be entered with certain character types in specific spots in the fieldentry window.

6. A user-defined field, if selected, will define the field as a deactivate date. Theselection shall automatically cause the data to be formatted with the windowsMM/DD/YYYY date format. The credential of the holder will be deactivated onthat date.

7. A search function shall allow any one user-defined field or combination of user-defined fields to be searched to find the appropriate cardholder. The searchfunction shall include a search for a character string.

8. System shall have the ability to print cardholders based on and organized by theuser-defined fields.


Hope House


2.4 SURGE AND TAMPER PROTECTION

A. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external toequipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, orsensing leads. Include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor-entryconnection to components.

B. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on enclosures, control units, pull boxes, junctionboxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper-alarm signalwhen unit is opened or partially disassembled. Control-station control-unit alarmdisplay shall identify tamper alarms and indicate locations.

2.5 STANDARD WORKSTATION HARDWARE

A. Workstation shall consist of a standard unmodified PC with accessories andperipherals that configure the workstation for a specific duty.

B. Comply with system manufacturers requirements for hardware and software.

2.6 CONTROLLERS

A. Controllers: Intelligent peripheral control unit, complying with UL 294, that stores time,date, valid codes, access levels, and similar data downloaded from the central stationor workstation for controlling its operation.

B. Subject to compliance with requirements in this article, manufacturers may usemultipurpose controllers.

C. Battery Backup: Sealed, lead acid; sized to provide run time during a power outage of90 minutes, complying with UL 924.

D. Entry-Control Controller:

1. Function: Provide local entry-control functions including one- and two-waycommunications with access-control devices such as card readers, keypads,biometric personnel identity-verification devices, door strikes, magnetic latches,gate and door operators, and exit push buttons.

a. Operate as a stand-alone portal controller using the downloaded databaseduring periods of communication loss between the controller and the field-device network.

b. Accept information generated by the entry-control devices; automaticallyprocess this information to determine valid identification of the individualpresent at the portal:

1) On authentication of the credentials or information presented, checkprivileges of the identified individual, allowing only those actionsgranted as privileges.

2) Privileges shall include, but are not limited to, time of day control, dayof week control, group control, and visitor escort control.


Hope House


c. Maintain a date-, time-, and Location-stamped record of each transaction.A transaction is defined as any successful or unsuccessful attempt to gainaccess through a controlled portal by the presentation of credentials orother identifying information.

2. Inputs:

a. Data from entry-control devices; use this input to change modes betweenaccess and secure.

b. Database downloads and updates from the central station that includeenrollment and privilege information.

3. Outputs:

a. Indicate success or failure of attempts to use entry-control devices andmake comparisons of presented information with stored identificationinformation.

b. Grant or deny entry by sending control signals to portal-control devices.c. Maintain a date-, time-, and Location-stamped record of each transaction

and transmit transaction records to the central station.d. Door Prop Alarm: If a portal is held open for longer than 20 seconds, alarm

sounds.

4. With power supplies and battery back up sufficient to power at voltage andfrequency required for field devices and portal-control devices.

5. Data Line Problems: For periods of loss of communication with the centralstation, or when data transmission is degraded and generating continuouschecksum errors, the controller shall continue to control entry by acceptingidentifying information, making authentication decisions, checking privileges, andcontrolling portal-control devices.

a. Store up to 1000 transactions during periods of communication lossbetween the controller and access-control devices for subsequent uploadto the central station on restoration of communication.

6. Controller Power: NFPA 70, Class II power-supply transformer, with 12- or 24-Vac secondary, backup battery and charger.

a. Backup Battery: Valve-regulated, recombinant-sealed, lead-acid battery;spill proof. With single-stage, constant-voltage-current, limited batterycharger, comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for batteryterminal voltage and charging current recommendations for maximumbattery life.

b. Backup Power-Supply Capacity: 90 minutes of battery supply. Submitbattery and charger calculations.


Hope House


c. Power Monitoring: Provide manual, dynamic battery-load test, initiated andmonitored at the control center; with automatic disconnection of thecontroller when battery voltage drops below controller limits. Report byusing local controller-mounted digital displays and by communicating statusto central station. Indicate normal power on and battery charger on tricklecharge. Indicate and report the following:

1) Trouble Alarm: Normal power-off load assumed by battery.2) Trouble Alarm: Low battery.3) Alarm: Power off.

E. The access system shall operate in conjunction with the buildings fire alarm systemand meet all requirements for Fire Safety.

2.7 ACCESS READERS, CREDENTIAL KEYFOBS

A. Reader Power: Powered from its associated controller, including its standby powersource, and shall not dissipate more than 5 W.

B. Response Time: Card reader shall respond to passage requests by generating a signalthat is sent to the controller. Response time shall be 800 ms or less, from the time thecard reader finishes reading the credential card until a response signal is generated.

C. Enclosure: Suitable for surface, semi-flush, pedestal, or weatherproof mounting.Mounting types shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations:

1. Indoors, controlled environment.2. Indoors, uncontrolled environment.3. Outdoors, with built-in heaters or other cold-weather equipment to extend the

operating temperature range as needed for operation at the site.

D. Display: Digital visual indicator shall provide visible and audible status indications anduser prompts. Indicate power on or off, whether user passage requests have beenaccepted or rejected, and whether the door is locked or unlocked.

E. Touch-Plate and Proximity Readers:

1. Readers shall be I-Class type readers.2. Passive-detection proximity readers shall use a swept-frequency, RF field

generator to read the resonant frequencies of tuned circuits embedded intocompatible credential fobs. The resonant frequencies read shall constitute aunique identification code number.

3. The reader shall read proximity fobs in a range from direct contact to at least 6inches from the reader.

4. Readers shall be weatherized for indoor and outdoor use.5. Readers shall be vandal resistant, sealed in a rugged polycarbonate enclosure.6. Readers:

a. Reader(s): Basis of design shall be Iclass R40 by HID.

7. Reader type and location shall be coordinated with Owner.


Hope House


F. Access Devices:

1. Access devices shall be I-Class key FOB as directed by Owner.2. Provide one-hundred (100) I-Class cards or key FOBS as selected by Owner.

G. Access – Egress Sensors:

1. Monitoring of exiting of space – surface mount sensor – DS150i by Bosch orapproved equal.

H. Door Contacts Switches

1. Mandoors – Sealed electromagnetic contacts – closed loop, wide gap Model#29AWG by GRI or approved equal. Coordinate with Architectural DoorSchedules.

I. Communication Protocol: Compatible with local processor.

2.8 ELECTRONIC DOOR STRIKES/LATCHES

A. Make complete connection to electric door strikes furnished by others. Corrdinateinstallation with Supplier. Verify voltage requirements with Supplier. Provide withnecessary power supply and controller.

B. Utilize quick disconnect connector for wiring to all doors with removable mullions.

C. Contractor to field review each door being controlled and provide appropriateequipment and hardware for the applicable door.

D. Door Lock Power Supplies:

1. Manufacturer: Altronix eFlow Series2. Part#: 4amp – eFlow4NX3. Part#: 6amp – eFlow6NX4. Part#: 10amp – eFow 102NX5. Size as required per manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, andother elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazardsto cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation.

B. Examine roughing-in for LAN and control cable conduit systems to PCs, controllers,card readers, and other cable-connected devices to verify actual locations of conduitand back boxes before device installation.



Hope House


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with recommendations in SIA CP-01.

B. Comply with TIA/EIA 606-A, "Administration Standard for CommercialTelecommunications Infrastructure."

C. In meetings with Architect and Owner, present Project planning documents and review,adjust, and prepare final setup documents. Use final documents to set up systemsoftware.

3.3 CABLING

A. Comply with NECA 1, "Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction."

B. Install cables and wiring according to requirements in Sections 260519 "Low VoltageElectrical Power Conductors and Cables" and 260523 “Control Voltage ElectricalPower Cables”.

C. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles,cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsumboard partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use NRTL-listedplenum cable in environmental airspaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal racewayand cables except in unfinished spaces.

D. Install LAN cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent withCategory 5E rating of components and fiber-optic rating of components, and thatensure Category 6 and fiber-optic performance of completed and linked signal paths,end to end.

E. Boxes and enclosures containing security-system components or cabling, and whichare easily accessible to employees or to the public, shall be provided with a lock.Boxes above ceiling level in occupied areas of the building shall not be consideredaccessible. Junction boxes and small device enclosures below ceiling level and easilyaccessible to employees or the public shall be covered with a suitable cover plate andsecured with tamperproof screws.

F. Install end-of-line resistors at the field device location and not at the controller or panellocation.

3.4 CABLE APPLICATION

A. Comply with TIA 569-B, "Commercial Building Standard for TelecommunicationsPathways and Spaces."

B. Cable application requirements are minimum requirements and shall be exceeded ifrecommended or required by manufacturer of system hardware.

C. TIA 232-F Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 50 ft.


Hope House


D. TIA 485-A Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 4000 ft.

E. Access Readers:

1. Install number of conductor pairs recommended by manufacturer for thefunctions specified.

2. Unless manufacturer recommends larger conductors, install No. 22 AWG wire ifmaximum distance from controller to the reader is 250 ft., and install No. 20 AWGwire if maximum distance is 500 ft.

3. For greater distances, install "extender" or "repeater" modules recommended bymanufacturer of the controller.

4. Install minimum No. 18 AWG shielded cable to readers and keypads that draw50 mA or more.

5. Install within ADA reach range – coordinate with Architect.

F. Install minimum No. 16 AWG cable from controller to electrically powered locks. Do notexceed 250 ft.

G. Install minimum No. 18 AWG ac power wire from transformer to controller, with amaximum distance of 25 ft.

H. All cable sizes and quantities to be verified with manufacturers approved shopdrawings.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Comply with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding"

B. Comply with IEEE 1100, "Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding ElectronicEquipment."

C. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard andto minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and otherimpairments.

D. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit.

E. Signal Ground:

1. Terminal: Locate in each equipment room and wiring closet; isolate from powersystem and equipment grounding.

2. Bus: Mount on wall of main equipment room with standoff insulators.3. Backbone Cable: Extend from signal ground bus to signal ground terminal in

each equipment room and wiring closet.


Hope House


3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. In addition to requirements in this article, comply with applicable requirements inSection 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and with TIA/EIA 606-A.

B. Using software specified in "Cable and Asset Management Software" Article, developcable administration drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Useunique, alphanumeric designation for each cable, and label cable and jacks,connectors, and terminals to which it connects with the same designation. Use logicaland systematic designations for facility's architectural arrangement.

C. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

1. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered,and each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to abuilding-mounted device shall be identified with the name and number of theparticular device as shown.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numberedat the device if the color of the wire is consistent with the associated wireconnected and numbered within the panel or cabinet.

D. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.

3.7 SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE

A. Develop, install, and test software and hardware, and perform database tests for thecomplete and proper operation of systems involved. Assign software license to Owner.



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representativeto inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, includingconnections, and to assist in testing.


1. LAN Cable Procedures: Inspect for physical damage and test each conductorsignal path for continuity and shorts. Use Class 2, bidirectional, Category 5tester. Test for faulty connectors, splices, and terminations. Test according toTIA/EIA 568-B.1, "Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards -Part 1: General Requirements." Link performance for UTP cables must complywith minimum criteria in TIA/EIA 568-B.1.

2. Test each circuit and component of each system. Tests shall include, but are notlimited to, measurements of power-supply output under maximum load, signalloop resistance, and leakage to ground where applicable. System componentswith battery backup shall be operated on battery power for a period of not lessthan 10 percent of the calculated battery operating time. Provide specialequipment and software if testing requires special or dedicated equipment.


Hope House


3. Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors, demonstrateproduct capability and compliance with requirements. Test each signal path forend-to-end performance from each end of all pairs installed. Remove temporaryconnections when tests have been satisfactorily completed.

C. Devices and circuits will be considered defective if they do not pass tests andinspections.


3.9 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise and assist with startupservice.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to approved procedures thatwere developed in "Preparation" Article and with manufacturer's writteninstructions.

2. Enroll and prepare badges and access cards for Owner's operators,management, and security personnel.

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Maintain strict security during the installation of equipment and software. Roomshousing the control station, and workstations that have been powered up shall belocked and secured with an activated burglar alarm and access-control systemreporting to a central station complying with UL 1610, "Central-Station Burglar-AlarmUnits," during periods when a qualified operator in the employ of Contractor is notpresent.

3.11 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenancepersonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain security access system. SeeSection 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

B. Develop separate training modules for the following:

1. Computer system administration personnel to manage and repair the LAN anddatabases and to update and maintain software.

2. Operators who prepare and input credentials to man the control station andworkstations and to enroll personnel.

3. Security personnel.4. Hardware maintenance personnel.5. Corporate management.



Hope House

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 1

SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-alarm control unit.2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.3. System smoke detectors.4. Heat detectors.5. Notification appliances.6. Device guards.7. Remote annunciator.8. Addressable interface device.9. Buffalo Fire Dept. (BFD) connection.10. Network communications.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.

B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.

C. HLI: High Level Interface.

D. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

E. PC: Personal computer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, andfinishes.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electricalcharacteristics.


Hope House


B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.

1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation"section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations.Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, anddistinguish between factory and field wiring.

4. Detail assembly and support requirements.5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits.6. Include battery-size calculations.7. Include input/output matrix.8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have

been tested as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and inNFPA 72.

9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector.10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity,

temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.11. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-

conditioning ducts, drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectorsand access to them.

a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support ofsampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarmindicators.

b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm.c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

12. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of eachaddressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.

C. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior tosubmitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level III minimum.c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heatdetectors, in addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performancerequirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by thequalified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke andheat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply withlisting conditions of the device.


Hope House


2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing andsensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing andintensities for strobe signals and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.

3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal perNFPA 72.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to includein emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and MaintenanceData," include the following and deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing andMaintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record ofCompletion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents"Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter inNFPA 72.

c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devicesand equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junctionpoint with indication of origination and termination points.

d. Riser diagram.e. Device addresses.f. Air-sampling system sample port locations and modeling program report

showing layout meets performance criteria.g. Record copy of site-specific software.h. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection,

Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include thefollowing:

1) Equipment tested.2) Frequency of testing of installed components.3) Frequency of inspection of installed components.4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of

maintenance.5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.

i. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warrantyrequirements.

j. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unitand each annunciator unit.


Hope House




1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent ofamount installed, but no fewer than one unit.

2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, butno fewer than one unit.

3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount ofeach type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.

4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type installed,but no fewer than one unit of each type.

5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked or tamperproofedcomponents.

6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system. Provide in a box or cabinet

with compartments marked with fuse types and sizes.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer forinstallation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level III technician.

C. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL (nationallyrecognized testing laboratory).

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm systemequipment and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specifiedwarranty period.

1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in theMaintenance Service Agreement.

2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.


Hope House


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURING


1. Fire-Lite Alarms: a Honeywell Company.2. Notifier: a Honeywell Company.3. SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International company.4. Gamewell FCI.5. Edwards United Technologies.


A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: All components shall belisted and shall operate as a complete functioning system. Provide systemmanufacturer's certification that all components provided have been tested as, and willoperate as a system.

B. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission andhorn/strobe evacuation.

C. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors.

D. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location andapplication.

2.3 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices andsystems:

1. Manual stations.2. Heat detectors.3. Smoke detectors.4. Duct smoke detectors.5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit, connected

network control panels, off-premises network control panels, and remoteannunciators.

3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.


Hope House


4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.5. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-

alarm mode.6. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.7. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.8. Record events in the system memory.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices andactions:

1. User disabling of zones or individual devices.2. Loss of communication with any panel on the network.3. Carbon monoxide detection.4. Valve supervisory switch.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices andactions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-

initiating devices.3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay,

control module, remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module.4. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit.6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.7. Break in standby battery circuitry.8. Failure of battery charging.9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

E. System Supervisory Signal Actions:

1. Initiate notification appliances.2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit, connected

network control panels, off-premises network control panels, and remoteannunciators.

3. Record the event on system printer.4. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to

the remote alarm receiving station.5. Transmit system status to building management system.6. Display system status on remote annunciator.


Hope House


2.4 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited designwith electronic modules, complying with UL 864.

a. System software and programs shall be held in nonvolatile flash,electrically erasable, programmable, read-only memory, retaining theinformation through failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the eventrecorder and printer.

c. Provide communication between the FACP and remote circuit interfacepanels, annunciators, and displays.

d. The FACP shall be listed for connection to a central-station signalingsystem service.

e. Provide nonvolatile memory for system database, logic, and operatingsystem and event history. The system shall require no manual input toinitialize in the event of a complete power down condition. The FACPshall provide a minimum 500-event history log.

2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate whichcommunication zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencingof alarm notification appliance by building communication zone.

3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances andMechanical Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service.

B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between humanoperator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components includingannunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component statusmessages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters, minimum.2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and

control commands.

C. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits:

1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class B.2. Pathway Survivability: Level 1.3. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling-line circuit.4. Serial Interfaces:

a. One dedicated RS 485 port for remote station operation using pointID DACT.

b. One RS 485 port for remote annunciators, Ethernet module, or multi-interface module (printer port).

c. One USB port for PC configuration.


Hope House


D. Smoke-Alarm Verification:

1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm control unit.

2. Activate an approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unitand detector.

3. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.4. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not

verified.

E. Notification-Appliance Circuit:

1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined inNFPA 72.

2. Visual devices shall stop flashing when audible devices are silenced at the FireAlarm Control Unit per NFPA 72.

3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multipleappliances are in the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.

F. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specificaddressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status andsensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to programrepetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detectorgroups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes insystem memory, and print out the final adjusted values on system printer.

G. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm,supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

H. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module.Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisoryand digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent ofthe power-supply module rating.

I. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger,and automatic transfer switch.

J. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.

K. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plasticor glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation anddescribe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functionaloperation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.


Hope House


2.5 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shallbe finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color;shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outletbox. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-levertype; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at

the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuatesan integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarmoperation.

4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosurehinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

2.6 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.2. Detectors shall be four-wire type.3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status

(normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be

mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminalsin the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment afteractuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated andpower-on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration,sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.

a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection units shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20deg F per minute.

b. Fixed-temperature sensing characteristic of combination smoke- andheat-detection units shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing andshall be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155deg F.

c. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.d. Sensitivity levels based on time of day.


Hope House


B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall beable to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivitysetting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shallbe able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.b. Device type.c. Present average value.d. Present sensitivity selected.e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

C. Ionization Smoke Detector:



a. Primary status.b. Device type.c. Present average value.d. Present sensitivity selected.e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.



a. Primary status.b. Device type.c. Present average value.d. Present sensitivity selected.e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).f. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL

listed for use with the supplied detector for smoke detection in HVACsystem ducts.

3. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.4. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for

specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.5. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-

control circuit.


Hope House


2.7 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range ofthe device.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg For a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status

(normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

C. Heat Detector, Conventional Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135deg F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Mount to a single gang or octagonal back box.2. Provide a separate Addressable Module to communicate status of detectors in

the area (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. Refer to drawingsfor more information.

3. Operating Humidity Range: 5%-95% RH Non-condensing.4. UL protected spacing of 50’ X 50’ based on a 10’-0” ceiling height.

2.8 COMBINATION SMOKE/CO DETECTORS

A. Detector shall be an intelligent, addressable device powered from fire alarm systemwith separate sensing elements to detect the presence of both smoke and carbonmonoxide

B. Detector shall send separate detection signals to the fire alarm control panel for smokeand carbon monoxide detection. Carbon monoxide detection signal shall initiate asupervisory condition at the fire alarm control panel and shall not be permitted toactivate the fire alarm notification appliances throughout the building.

C. Detector shall be provided with a sounder base to generate a local temporal 4 patternfor carbon monoxide detection.

D. Detector shall be listed and approved for connection to the building fire alarm controlpanel.

E. Detector shall be listed in Accordance with UL 2075 and UL 268 standards and shallbe installed in accordance with NFPA 720 requirements.


Hope House


2.9 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliancesignal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screwterminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in asingle-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screwterminals for system connections.

B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing theoperating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce asound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the codedsignal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.

C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clearor nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word"FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output:

a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.b. 177cd for sleeping unitsc. All battery calculating to be performed with highest rated light output for

all devices shown on plans.

2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be

determined with guards in place.4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red and white.

D. Exit Marking Audible Notification Appliance:

1. Exit marking audible notification appliances shall meet the audibilityrequirements in NFPA 72.

2. Provide exit marking audible notification appliances at the entrance to allbuilding exits.

3. Provide exit marking audible notification appliances at the entrance to areas ofrefuge with audible signals distinct from those used for building exit marking.


Hope House


2.10 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit foralarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall matchthose of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, andtesting.

1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicatinglights shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge,silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.

2.11 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. General:

1. Include address-setting means on the module.2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module

type.3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.

B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiatingdevices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiateelevator recall and to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.

1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command.2. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts

available for field wiring.

D. Control Module:

1. Operate notification devices.2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.


Hope House


2.12 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote centralstation and shall comply with UL 632.

B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signalfrom fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture two telephone line(s) and dial apreset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with centralstation(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longerthan 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signalindicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over theremaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration tothe central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate thelocal trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall includethe following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.2. Programming device.3. LED display.4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Address of the alarm-initiating device.2. Address of the supervisory signal.3. Address of the trouble-initiating device.4. Loss of ac supply.5. Loss of power.6. Low battery.7. Abnormal test signal.8. Communication bus failure.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to centralstation.

2.13 BUFFALO FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION

A. Master Box Tie-In: Furnish and install a Digitize Corporation Model #DET-6 MasterElectronic Fire Alarm Box. The DT-6 Digitized shall be complete with:

1. Metal surface mount enclosure.2. Two (2) T11 Model 317-A Lighting Arrestors.


Hope House


B. City Circuit: Furnish and install a 12” x 12” x 3” surface mounted metal enclosure withremovable front cover where the city circuit enters the building. The 12” x 12” x 3”enclosure shall be complete with:

1. 3/4” plywood background installed inside enclosures. Plywood shall be paintedred.

2. Enclosures shall be painted red and have 1/2” high white letters printed on thefront cover.

C. Provide 1/2” EMT conduit between 12” x 12” x 3” enclosure and the DET-6 completewith:

1. Five (5) #14 AWG with 18” slack left in each enclosure.2. One (1) #12 AWG ground conductor from an approved ground to the DET-6

enclosure.

D. Provide 1/2” EMT conduit between the DET-6 enclosure and the main fire alarm controlpanel with six (6) #16 AWG.

E. Field coordinate exact locations of the DET-6 and 12” x 12” x 3” enclosures with BFDprior to rough-in.

2.14 KNOX BOXES / KNOX VAULTS

A. Knox Company Series 4400/3200 Knox vaults/boxes shall be provided. Vaults shall beprovided if building has an elevator to accommodate the longer elevator keys.

B. Knox Vault with tamper switch, Dark Bronze – Part #4414

C. Surface mounted installations.

D. Provide a single lock not dual locks or padlocks. The manufacturer will send keysdirectly to the Buffalo Fire Department.

E. Provide hinged fronts.

F. Knox Boxes and Vault shall be of steel construction with a weather resistant proprietarycoating in dark bronze.

2.15 ELEVATOR RECALL

A. Elevator Recall

1. Elevator recall shall be initiated only by one of the following alarm-initiatingdevices:

a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor.(Recall to designated floor).

b. Elevator lobby detector on the designated floor (Recall to alternate floor)c. Smoke detector(s) in elevator machine room.d. Smoke detector at top of elevator shaft (if applicable).


Hope House


2. Elevator controller shall be programmed to move the cars to the alternate recallfloor if lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors are activated.

3. Initiation of any detectors(s) in the elevator machine room and/or hoist-way shallcause the illuminated “Fire Hat” signal on the elevator car to flash. Initiation ofany other device required to initiate recall as listed above shall solidly illuminatethe “Fire Hat” signal.

2.16 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS

A. Provide network communications for fire-alarm system according to fire-alarmmanufacturer's written requirements.

B. Provide network communications pathway per manufacturer's written requirementsand requirements in NFPA 72 and NFPA 70.

C. Provide integration gateway using compatible for connection to campus wide fire alarmsystem.

2.17 DEVICE GUARDS

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smokedetector, gong, or other device requiring protection.

1. Factory fabricated and furnished by device manufacturer.2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation,temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions havebeen permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring areinstalled, before installation begins.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connectionsbefore installation.



Hope House


3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdictionfor installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to complywith requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire AlarmSystems."

1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shallbe replaced.

2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected fromconstruction dust, debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according tomanufacturer's written storage instructions.

B. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches abovethe finished floor.

C. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:

1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches ofthe exit doorway.

2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color.3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48

inches above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same heightunless otherwise indicated.

D. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "InitiatingDevices" chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with the "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "InitiatingDevices" chapter in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and

for high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Annex A in NFPA 72.5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 36 inches from air-supply diffuser or

return-air opening.6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a

lighting fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting.

E. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service duringconstruction. Cover shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove coverprior to system turnover.

F. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubesso they extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches long shall besupported at both ends.

1. Do not install smoke detector in duct smoke-detector housing duringconstruction. Install detector only during system testing and prior to systemturnover.


Hope House


G. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smokedetector, sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visiblefrom normal viewing position.

H. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling.Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operatingmechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unlessotherwise indicated.

I. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn andat least 6 inches below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unlessotherwise indicated.

J. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

3.3 PATHWAYS

A. Cabling above accessible ceilings may be routed exposed. Cabling in this applicationshall be plenum rated and properly supported.

B. Wiring inside wall cavities and in exposed/unfinished spaces shall be installed inconduit. Comply with requirements in section 260533 “Raceway and Boxes forElectrical Systems”.

C. All fire alarm junction boxes shall be painted red enamel and clearly identified as firealarm circuits.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and todoors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "DoorHardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarmsystem before making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the followingdevices and systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the devicecontrolled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback isavailable at the device or system being controlled.

1. Coordinate list below with "Systems Operational Description" Article.2. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems.3. Electronically locked doors and access gates.4. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel

supplies.5. Data communication circuits for connection to building management system.6. Supervisory connections at fire-extinguisher locations.


Hope House


3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirementsfor identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install aground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.

B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at devicelocation.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative totest and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, includingconnections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

D. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorizedservice representative:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and systemdocumentation that is required by the "Completion Documents,Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the"Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the"Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and listonly the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" sectionof the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Retain first three subparagraphs below for additional tests not required byNFPA 72 but required by some jurisdictions. Engineer's calculations may beaccepted by some jurisdictions in lieu of testing.

4. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according tomanufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

5. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according tomanufacturer's written instructions.


Hope House


6. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according tomanufacturer's written instructions.

7. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm SystemRecord of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals"chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records"section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation ofadded or replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests andinspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly,monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests andinspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72.Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

J. Provide a “Statement of Compliance” letter to the local Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ) prior to scheduling final acceptance testing. The letter shall indicate that thesystem has been installed in compliance with all applicable codes/standards and thecontract documents.

3.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance serviceshall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer'sdesignated service organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair orreplacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting asrequired for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorizedreplacement parts and supplies.

1. Include visual inspections according to the "Visual Inspection Frequencies"table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Perform tests in the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Perform tests per the "Testing Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph ofthe "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.


Hope House


3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenancepersonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.
